Volvo XC90 2008 Operating instructions

VOLVO XC90
Owner Manual
Web Edition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust
that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an
automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We
encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment
descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also
urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in
this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate
a vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any
impairment that could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety and emission standards. For further information please contact your
retailer, or:
In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care
Center
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647-0914
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocanada.com
2008 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Contents
00 Introduction
01 Safety
General information.................................. 10
Volvo and the environment....................... 11
Important warnings................................... 13
Occupant safety........................................
Seat belts..................................................
Supplemental Restraint System...............
Front airbags.............................................
Occupant Weight Sensor..........................
Side impact protection airbags.................
Volvo Inflatable Curtain.............................
Whiplash Protection System.....................
Child safety...............................................
Child restraint systems.............................
Infant seats...............................................
Convertible seats......................................
Booster cushions......................................
ISOFIX lower anchors...............................
Top tether anchors....................................
Child restraint registration and recalls......
Integrated booster cushion.......................
02 Instruments and controls
16
18
20
21
25
28
29
31
33
35
37
39
42
43
45
46
47
Instrument overview..................................
Instrument panel.......................................
Information display...................................
Center console controls............................
Steering wheel adjustment.......................
Lighting panel...........................................
Manually unlocking the fuel filler door......
Left-side steering wheel lever...................
Right-side steering wheel lever.................
Hazard warning flashers...........................
Trip computer...........................................
Cruise control............................................
12-volt sockets.........................................
Parking brake............................................
Hood/tailgate............................................
Power windows.........................................
Mirrors.......................................................
Power moonroof.......................................
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
(option)......................................................
00 01 02
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
52
54
58
60
62
63
65
66
68
70
71
73
75
76
77
78
80
83
85
Contents
03 Climate
04 Interior
Climate control system – general information............................................................ 90
Air distribution........................................... 92
Electronic climate control (ECC)............... 93
Front seats..............................................
Rear seats...............................................
Interior lighting........................................
Storage compartments...........................
Securing cargo........................................
05 Locks and alarm
100
103
106
108
112
Keys and remote controls.......................
Locking and unlocking............................
Child safety locks....................................
Alarm.......................................................
03 04 05
118
122
124
125
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
Contents
06 Starting and driving
General information................................
Fuel requirements...................................
Refueling.................................................
Starting the vehicle.................................
Ignition switch and steering wheel lock. .
Economical driving..................................
Difficult driving conditions......................
Automatic transmission..........................
Jump starting..........................................
All Wheel Drive (option)...........................
Brake system..........................................
Stability system.......................................
Front/rear park assist (accessory/option)
Towing....................................................
Towing a trailer.......................................
Detachable trailer hitch...........................
Load carriers (accessory)........................
Cold weather precautions.......................
Before a long distance trip......................
Blind Spot Information System...............
128
129
131
133
135
136
137
138
141
142
143
145
147
149
151
155
156
157
158
159
07 Wheels and tires
08 Car care
General information................................ 166
Tire inflation ............................................ 168
Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. models............................................................ 170
Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadian
models.................................................... 171
Tire designations..................................... 172
Glossary of tire terminology.................... 174
Vehicle loading........................................ 175
Uniform Tire Quality Grading.................. 176
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires. . 177
Temporary spare..................................... 178
Tire rotation............................................. 179
Changing wheels.................................... 180
Tire Sealing System ............................... 185
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –
U.S. models only..................................... 190
Washing and cleaning the vehicle.......... 194
Paint touch up......................................... 198
06 07 08
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
Contents
09 Maintenance and servicing
Volvo service...........................................
Maintaining your vehicle.........................
Working on your vehicle.........................
Engine compartment...............................
Engine oil................................................
Fluids.......................................................
Wiper blades...........................................
Battery.....................................................
Replacing bulbs......................................
Fuses.......................................................
10 Audio
202
203
205
207
208
211
213
214
217
224
11 Specifications
Audio system overview...........................
Audio system controls............................
Radio functions.......................................
Sirius satellite radio.................................
Auxiliary equipment................................
CD player/changer..................................
Menu structure........................................
Rear Seat Entertainment - Dual Screen
(RSE)–option ..........................................
236
237
242
244
248
249
252
Label information....................................
Dimensions ............................................
Weights ..................................................
Fluids.......................................................
Suspension.............................................
Engine oil................................................
Engine specifications..............................
Electrical system.....................................
Three-way catalytic converter.................
Volvo programs.......................................
09 10 11
253
258
260
262
265
267
268
269
270
272
273
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
Contents
12 Index
Index....................................................... 274
12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
8
Contents
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
Introduction
General information
Shiftlock
When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector
is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the
selector from this position, turn the ignition key
to position II (or start the engine), depress the
brake pedal, press the button on the front side
of the gear selector and move the selector from
P (Park).
Important information
•
Before you operate your vehicle for the first
time, please familiarize yourself with the
new-engine oil consumption information
on page 209. You should also be familiar
with the information in chapters one, two
and eight of this manual.
•
Information contained in the balance of the
manual is extremely useful and should be
read after operating the vehicle for the first
time.
•
The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it
should be kept in the vehicle for ready
access.
•
Do not export your Volvo to another country before investigating that country's
applicable safety and exhaust emission
requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these
requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your
Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in
the U.S., Canada and other countries.
•
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on
the latest product information available at
the time of publication. Please note that
some vehicles may be equipped differ-
Keylock
When you switch off the ignition, the gear
selector must be in the (P)ark position before
the key can be removed from the ignition
switch.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS system in your vehicle performs a
self-diagnostic test when the vehicle first reaches the speed of approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several
times and a sound may be audible from the
ABS control module. This is normal.
Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel when
the car is at a standstill to open the fuel filler
door.
Fuel filler cap
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place. If this
cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Malfunc-
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
ently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in
this manual may not be available in all markets.al may not be available in all markets.
tion Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine" light) will
illuminate.
•
Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect your vehicle's
drivability and safety.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Volvo is committed to the well being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment,
we care about the environment in which we all
live. Caring for the environment means an
everyday involvement in reducing our environmental impact. Volvo's environmental activities
are based on a holistic view, which means we
consider the overall environmental impact of a
product throughout its complete life cycle. In
this context, design, production, product use,
and recycling are all important considerations.
In production, Volvo has partly or completely
phased out several chemicals including CFCs,
lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and
reduced the number of chemicals used in our
plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into
production a three-way catalytic converter with
a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen
sensor, in 1976. The current version of this
highly efficient system reduces emissions of
harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the
exhaust pipe by approximately 95-99% and
the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile
manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for
the air conditioning system of all models as far
back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are
bringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehicles and parts have fulfilled their use, recycling
is the next critical step in completing the life
cycle. The metal content is about 75% of the
total weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehicle among the most recycled industrial products. In order to have efficient and wellcontrolled recycling, dismantling information is
available for all Volvo models. For Volvo, all
homogeneous plastic parts weighing more
than 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with international symbols that indicate how the component is to be sorted for recycling. In addition
to continuous environmental refinement of
conventional gasoline-powered internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at
advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.
the environment. To reduce your vehicle's
environmental impact, you can:
•
Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires.
•
Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.
•
Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.
•
See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indicator) light illuminates, or stays on after the
vehicle has started.
•
Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc.
•
When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo
car care products are formulated to be
environmentally friendly.
For additional information regarding the environmental activities in which Volvo Cars of
North America, LLC and Volvo Car Corporation
are involved, visit our Internet home page at:
http://www.volvocars.us.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
11
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as
air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,
adaptive steering columns, and button cell
batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
Special handling may apply for service or
vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
12
Introduction
Important warnings
Information booklet for more warranty
information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that
may result from the installation of nongenuine accessories.
Accessory Installation
•
•
•
•
•
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved
accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician knows where
accessories may and may not be safely
installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please
consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.
Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
Additionally, an inexperienced installer
may not be familiar with some of your vehicle's systems.
Any of your vehicle's performance and
safety systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has
not tested, or if you allow accessories to be
installed by someone unfamiliar with your
vehicle.
Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records
Driver distraction
•
Driver distraction results from driver activities that are not directly related to controlling the vehicle in the driving environment.
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped
with many feature-rich entertainment and
communication systems. These include
hands-free cellular telephones, navigation
systems, and multipurpose audio systems.
You may also own other portable electronic devices for your own convenience.
When used properly and safely, they enrich
the driving experience. Improperly used,
any of these could cause a distraction.
•
For all of these systems, we want to provide the following warning that reflects the
strong Volvo concern for your safety:
•
Never use these devices or any feature of
your vehicle in a way that distracts you
from the task of driving safely. Distraction
can lead to a serious accident. In addition
to this general warning, we offer the following guidance regarding specific newer
features that may be found in your vehicle:
•
Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while the
vehicle is moving.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to your
travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.
•
Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use
quicker and simpler.
•
Never use portable computers or personal
digital assistants while the vehicle is moving.
A driver has a responsibility to do everything
possible to ensure his or her own safety and
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions
is part of that responsibility.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
13
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
14
16
18
20
21
25
28
29
31
33
35
37
39
42
43
45
46
47
G020871
Occupant safety......................................................................................
Seat belts................................................................................................
Supplemental Restraint System..............................................................
Front airbags...........................................................................................
Occupant Weight Sensor........................................................................
Side impact protection airbags...............................................................
Volvo Inflatable Curtain...........................................................................
Whiplash Protection System...................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
Child restraint systems...........................................................................
Infant seats..............................................................................................
Convertible seats....................................................................................
Booster cushions....................................................................................
ISOFIX lower anchors.............................................................................
Top tether anchors..................................................................................
Child restraint registration and recalls....................................................
Integrated booster cushion.....................................................................
SAFETY
01
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
01 Safety
Occupant safety
01
Volvo's concern for safety
Safety is the Volvo cornerstone. Our concern
dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled
off the production line. Three-point seat belts
(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energyabsorbing impact zones were designed into
Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable
or required by government regulation. We will
not compromise our commitment to safety. We
continue to seek out new safety features and
to refine those already in our vehicles. You can
help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety.
We also want to know if you ever have a safety
concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S.
at: 800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
800-663-8255.
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how
old you are but rather on:
•
•
•
How well you see.
Your ability to concentrate.
How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The tips listed below are suggestions to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.
•
•
Never drink and drive.
•
•
•
Take a driver-retraining course.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from:
Have your eyes checked regularly.
http://www.safercar.gov
Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.
•
Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
•
Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with
regard to stopping distance.
Volvo strongly recommends that if your vehicle
is covered under a service campaign, safety or
emission recall or similar action, it should be
completed as soon as possible. Please check
with your local retailer or Volvo Cars of North
America, LLC if your vehicle is covered under
these conditions.
If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects
on your driving abilities.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA receives
similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo Cars of
North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you
may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-888-327-4236
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
16
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: NHTSA,
U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590.
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
01 Safety
Occupant safety
01
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars
of Canada Corp.
To contact Transport Canada, call (800)
333-0510, or (613) 993-9851 if you are calling
from the Ottawa region.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
17
01 Safety
01
Seat belts
Using seat belts
sioners are triggered in situations where the
airbags deploy. The front seat belts also
include a tension reducing device which, in the
event of a collision, limits the peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.
Buckling a seat belt
G020104
Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is
heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided
that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.
Adjusting the seat belt
Volvo, the inventor of the three-point seat belt,
urges you and all occupants of your vehicle to
wear seat belts and ensure that children are
properly restrained, using an infant, car, or
booster seat determined by age, weight and
height.
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
front seat of a vehicle.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory
for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
Seat belt pretensioners
The seat belts are equipped with pretensioners
that reduce slack in the belts. These preten-
The retractor will lock up as follows:
•
•
•
•
if the belt is pulled out rapidly
during braking and acceleration
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
when driving in turns
When wearing the seat belt remember:
•
•
The belt should not be twisted or turned.
•
Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder
and lap belts are taut.
The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing against
the abdomen).
Unbuckling the seat belt
To remove the seat belt, press the red section
on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the
vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
18
after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the
belt back into the retractor slot.
Seat belt reminder
The seat belt reminder consists of an audible
signal, an indicator light above the rearview
mirror, and a symbol in the instrument panel
that alert the driver and front seat passenger if
their seat belts are not fastened.
01 Safety
Seat belts
•
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant.
•
Never wear the shoulder portion of the
belt under the arm, behind the back or
otherwise out of position. Such use
could cause injury in the event of an
accident.
•
Seat belts lose much of their strength
when exposed to violent stretching and
should be replaced after any collision,
even if they appear to be undamaged.
•
Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by an authorized Volvo service technician only.
•
Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental
effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a collision.
•
The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be taut
in order to function properly.
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.
Seat belt use during pregnancy
steering wheel). Within this context, they
should strive to position the seat with as large
a distance as possible between their belly and
the steering wheel.
Child seats
Please see page 34 for information on securing child seats with the seat belts.
Seat belt maintenance
G020105
WARNING
01
Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism
function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull
rapidly on the strap.
The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap
section should lay flat over the thighs and as
low as possible under the belly. It must never
be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack
from the belt and insure that it fits close to the
body without any twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means they must
be able to easily operate the foot pedals and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
19
01 Safety
01
Supplemental Restraint System
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
WARNING
Where applicable, a text message
will also be displayed when the SRS warning
light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not
functioning properly, the general warning symbol illuminates and a text message will be displayed.
WARNING
G027284
•
SRS warning light
As an enhancement to the three-point seat
belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS
consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags, side impact airbags, the occupant
weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of
these systems are monitored by the SRS control module. An SRS warning light in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates
when the ignition key is turned to position I, II,
or III, and will normally go out after approximately 7 seconds if no faults are detected in
the system.
•
If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
an authorized Volvo service technician.
Automatic transmission:
Before attempting to tow the vehicle, use
the following procedure to override the
shiftlock system to move the gear selector
to the neutral position:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Wait at least one minute.
3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it
to position II
4. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
5. Move the gear selector from P (Park) to
the N(Neutral) position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
20
If your vehicle has been subjected to flood
conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your
vehicle has become flood-damaged in any
way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or
put the key in the ignition before disconnecting the battery (see below). This may
cause airbag deployment which could result
in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs.
01 Safety
Front airbags
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the
protection intended, seat belts must be worn
at all times.
The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators,
causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen
gas.
•
The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.
•
The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove
compartment.
G031006
G020111
The front airbag system
01
Location of the passenger's side front airbag
As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better
cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also
deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second.
The location of the front airbags is indicated by
SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
pad and above the glove compartment, and by
decals on both sun visors and on the front and
far right side of the dash.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
21
01 Safety
01
Front airbags
WARNING
•
The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For
maximum protection, wear seat belts at
all times. Be aware that no system can
prevent all possible injuries that may
occur in an accident.
•
Never drive a vehicle with a steering
wheel-mounted airbag with your hands
on the steering wheel pad/airbag housing.
•
•
The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment
occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment
and depending on variables such as
seating position, one may experience
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other
injuries as a result from deployment of
one or both of the airbags.
When installing any accessory equipment, make sure that the front airbag
system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction.
Front airbag deployment
•
The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and
object impacted. The airbags may also
deploy in certain non-frontal collisions
where rapid deceleration occurs.
•
The SRS sensors, which trigger the front
airbags, are designed to react to both the
impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient for
the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags
to be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.
•
If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed
object at a low speed, the front airbags will
not necessarily deploy.
•
Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the
rear or in a rollover situation.
•
The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.
NOTE
•
Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners activate. Some noise occurs and a small
amount of powder is released. The
release of the powder may appear as
smoke-like matter. This is a normal
characteristic and does not indicate fire.
•
Volvo's front airbags use special sensors that are integrated with the front
seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether
or not the seat belt is being used, as well
as the severity of the collision.
•
Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is
more severe, the airbags are triggered
at full capacity.
Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo Customer Support:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
22
01 Safety
Front airbags
Customer Care Center
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened.
•
Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.
•
The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure.
New Jersey 07647-0914
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocanada.com
G032243
WARNING
Airbag decal in the front passenger's door opening
G032934
P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh,
01
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
23
01 Safety
01
Front airbags
G032525
WARNING
•
Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat. Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and
children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of
any vehicle with a passenger-side front
airbag.
•
Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat,
sit leaning toward the instrument panel
or otherwise sit out of position.
•
The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the
seat back with the seat belt properly
fastened.
•
Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.
Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
24
WARNING
•
No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the air
bag hatch (the area above the glove
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment.
•
There should be no loose articles, e.g.
coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dashboard area.
•
Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
under certain conditions.
The OWS works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly seated occupant and determine if
the passenger's side front airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
inflate).
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on
to remind you that the passenger's side front
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead
console, near the base of the rearview mirror.
NOTE
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp will illuminate for a short period of time
when the ignition is turned on to confirm it
is functional. When the front passenger's
seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the passenger's side front airbag
is enabled (may inflate), the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off.
G027050
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when:
•
the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
or has small/medium objects in the front
seat,
•
the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions,
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults
and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehicle with a passenger's side front airbag, and be
properly restrained. Children should always be
seated in child restraints appropriate for their
size and weight. For child safety recommendations, see page 33.
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,
•
a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,
•
a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
01
However, if a fault is detected in the system:
•
•
The OWS indicator light will stay on
•
The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF
SERVICE URGENT will be displayed in the
information display.
The SRS warning light (see page 20) will
come on and stay on
``
25
01 Safety
01
Occupant Weight Sensor
WARNING
•
If a fault in the system is detected and
indicated as explained, be aware that
the passenger's side front airbag will
not deploy in the event of a collision.
•
In this case, the safety systems and
Occupant Weight Sensor should be
inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
illuminate and stay on to remind you that the
passenger's side front airbag is disabled (see
the following table).
Passenger's seat
occupancy status
OWS indicator light
status
Passenger's side
front airbag status
Seat unoccupied
OWS indicator light
Passenger's
side front
airbag disabled
WARNING
•
•
is
not lit
Never try to open, remove, or repair any
components in the OWS system. This
could result in system malfunction.
Maintenance or repairs should only be
carried out by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could
reduce pressure on the seat cushion,
which might interfere with the OWS system's function.
The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag when a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. The
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will
A
Seat occupied by low
weight
occupant/
objectA
OWS indicator light
Seat occupied by
heavy occupant/object
OWS indicator light
lights up
is
not lit
Passenger's
side front
airbag enabled
Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.In
rare situations when the seat belt is not properly fastened,
some child restraints may not be detected by the OWS
because there is very little weight on the vehicle seat cushion. In these cases the passenger's side front airbag may be
disabled, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
26
Passenger's
side front
airbag disabled
will not be lit. Do not assume that the passenger's side front
airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly
installed (turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from
the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions) and that the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, or move
the child restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front passenger's seat.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp will be off and remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible
that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens:
1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seat back in an upright position.
2. Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.
3. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
WARNING
•
This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate
OWS malfunction.
Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
any way to accommodate a disability, for
example by altering or adapting the driver's or
front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at:
•
The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the
OWS system's function.
•
The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more
pressure on the passenger than normal.
This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh,
New Jersey 07647-0914
1-800-458-1552
In Canada
No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the
front passenger's seat. If a child is
seated in the front passenger's seat
with any additional weight, this extra
weight could cause the OWS system to
enable the airbag, which might cause it
to deploy in the event of a collision,
thereby injuring the child.
WARNING
Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow
these instructions could adversely affect the
system's function and result in serious injury
to the occupant of the front passenger's
seat:
•
The full weight of the front seat passenger should always be on the seat cushion. The passenger should never lift
him/herself off the seat cushion using
the armrest in the door or the center
console, by pressing the feet on the
floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat
cushion, or by pressing against the
backrest in a way that reduces pressure
on the seat cushion. This could cause
OWS to disable the front passenger's
side airbag.
•
Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way
that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
occurs between the object and the front
seat, other than as a direct result of the
correct use of the Automatic Locking
Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 34).
•
No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
01
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
27
01 Safety
01
Side impact protection airbags
WARNING
Location of the SIPS airbag
Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag
As an enhancement to the structural side
impact protection built into your vehicle, the
vehicle is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) airbags.
The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of
certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat
belt system. It is not designed to deploy
during collisions from the front or rear of
the vehicle or in rollover situations.
•
The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.
•
No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to
or installed near the SIPS airbag system
or in the area affected by SIPS airbag
deployment.
•
Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.
NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by
the impact. The airbags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
Components in the SIPS airbag system
This SIPS airbag system consists of gas generators and side airbag modules built into the
outboard sides of both front seat backrests.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
28
•
G025315
G020118
Side impact airbags – front seats only
01 Safety
Volvo Inflatable Curtain
The Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)
01
However, in certain side impacts, or in a rollover situation, BOTH the Inflatable Curtains
and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS-bag)
will deploy, whereas, in some cases, ONLY the
Inflatable Curtain will deploy. In cases where
BOTH the Inflatable Curtain and the SIPS-bag
deploy, deployment will occur simultaneously.
NOTE
G027047
G027048
If the Inflatable Curtain deploys, it remains
inflated for approximately 5 seconds.
This system consists of inflatable curtains
located along the sides of the roof liners,
stretching from the front side windows to the
rear edge of the rear side windows. It is
designed to help protect the heads of the occupants of the front seats and the occupants of
the outboard rear seating positions, including
the outboard passenger in the optional third
row of seats in certain side impact collisions.
The inflatable curtains in the Volvo XC90 are
also designed to help protect the occupants of
the vehicle in a roll-over situation, and to help
prevent them from being thrown from the vehicle if a roll-over occurs.
WARNING
•
The VIC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is not
designed to deploy during collisions
from the front or rear of the vehicle or in
all rollover situations.
•
Never try to open or repair any components of the VIC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•
Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
handles. This could impede deployment
of the Inflatable curtain.
NOTE
In 5 -seat models, the Inflatable Curtains
extend to protect both rows of seats. In 7 seat models, they extend to protect all three
rows.
By design, the VIC system deploys only on the
side of the vehicle affected by the impact.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
29
01 Safety
01
Volvo Inflatable Curtain
WARNING
In order for the VIC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and both
outboard rear seat occupants should sit in
an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and
children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats.
Children must never be allowed in the front
passenger seat. See page 34 for guidelines. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an
accident.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
30
01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System
01
G020347
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only
The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) consists of specially designed hinges and brackets
on the front seat backrests designed to help
absorb some of the energy generated in a collision from the rear (when the vehicle is "rearended").
In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges
and brackets of the front seat backrests are
designed to change position slightly to allow
the backrest/head restraint to help support the
occupant's head before moving slightly rearward. This movement helps absorb some of
the forces that could result in whiplash.
WARNING
•
The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in
your vehicle. For this system to function
properly, the three-point seat belt must
be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that
may occur in an accident.
•
The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear,
depending on the crash severity, angle
and speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING
Occupants in the front seats must never sit
out of position. The occupant's back must
be as upright as comfort allows and be
against the seat back with the seat belt
properly fastened.
``
31
01 Safety
01
Whiplash Protection System
WARNING
•
WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat could impede
the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear
seat is folded down, the occupied front
seats must be adjusted forward so that they
do not touch the folded rear seat.
Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself.
G020125
G020126
•
WARNING
If your vehicle has been involved in a
rear-end collision, the front seat backrests must be inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician, even
if the seats appear to be undamaged.
Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
32
•
Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system.
•
If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
Child safety
Children should be seated safely
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/
LATCH attachments, which make it more convenient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
Such child restraint systems can help protect
children in vehicles in the event of an accident
only if they are used properly. However, children could be endangered in a crash if the child
restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions
for your child restraint can result in your child
striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
an unrestrained person. The child could also be
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver
or impact. The same can also happen if the
infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.
Other occupants should also be properly
restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring
or increasing the injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations
existing in your state or province. Recent accident statistics have shown that children are
safer in rear seating positions than front seating
positions when properly restrained. A child
restraint system can help protect a child in a
vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting
a child restraint system:
•
It should have a label certifying that it
meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, CMVSS 213.
•
Make sure the child restraint system is
approved for the child's height, weight and
development – the label required by the
standard or regulation, or instructions for
infant restraints, typically provide this information.
•
In using any child restraint system, we urge
you to carefully look over the instructions
that are provided with the restraint. Be sure
you understand them and can use the
device properly and safely in this vehicle.
A misused child restraint system can result
in increased injuries for both the infant or
child and other occupants in the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
01
When a child has outgrown the child safety
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
help protect the child here is to place the child
on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly
located on the hips, see page 42. Legislation
in your state or province may mandate the use
of a child seat or cushion in combination with
the seat belt, depending on the child's age and/
or size. Please check local regulations.
A specially designed and tested booster cushion (not available in Canada) can be obtained
from your Volvo retailer for children weighing
33 – 80 lb. (15 – 36 kg) and 38-54 inches
(97 – 137 cm) in height.
WARNING
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened.
•
On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure to these high temperatures
for even a short period of time can
cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.
``
33
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend that
children who have outgrown these devices
sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly
fastened.
To make child seat installation easier, each
seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the
seat belt taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the
buckle (lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around
the child seat. A sound from the seat belt
retractor will be audible at this time and
is normal.
The belt will now be locked in place.
This function is automatically disabled
when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt
is fully retracted.
•
Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
in the vehicle be properly restrained.
•
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
•
Drive safely!
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit
in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite simple
really. A front airbag is a very powerful device
designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in
the front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo
has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our
part. But we need your help. Please remember
to put your children in the back seat, and
buckle them up.
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:
•
•
Always wear your seat belt.
Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a threepoint seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
34
Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle.
WARNING
01 Safety
Child restraint systems
01
Convertible seat
G026489
G026503
G026491
Child restraints
Booster cushion
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and
booster cushions. They are classified according to the child's age and size.
The following section provides general information on securing a child restraint using a
three-point seat belt. Refer to page 43 and
page 45 for information on securing a child
restraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or
top tether anchorages.
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol near
the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to
cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to
serious injury or death to a child seated in
this position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information
on securing the restraint.
``
35
01 Safety
01
Child restraint systems
WARNING
•
When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or collision.
•
A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
36
01 Safety
Infant seats
01
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Refer to page 43 and page 45 for information on securing a child restraint using
ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.
WARNING
•
An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
•
The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
G026492
G026493
G026417
Securing an infant seat with a seat belt
Fasten the seat belt
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this position.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
``
37
01 Safety
01
Infant seats
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any
direction.
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
G026498
G026494
The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic
locking function will be audible at this time
and is normal. The seat belt should now be
locked in place.
6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure that
it is held securely in place by the seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
38
01 Safety
Convertible seats
WARNING
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the
convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations.
A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is
still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained,
facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward
facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
G026420
Securing a convertible seat with a seat
belt
01
G026503
Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat
G026500
Refer to page 43 and page 45 for information on securing a child restraint using
ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.
Fasten the seat belt
Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
39
01 Safety
01
Convertible seats
WARNING
•
Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only.
•
A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
unless there is adequate space for safe
installation.
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
NOTE
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
WARNING
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at
this time and is normal. The seat belt
should now be locked in place.
6. Push and pull the convertible seat to
ensure that it is held securely in place by
the seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
40
G026502
G026501
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any
direction.
The convertible seat can be removed by
unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
completely.
01 Safety
Convertible seats
01
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol near
the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to
cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to
serious injury or death to a child seated in
this position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
41
01 Safety
01
Booster cushions
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion
Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
G026517
G026513
Securing a booster cushion
Positioning the seat belt
4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.
WARNING
•
The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
•
The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.
•
The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the
arm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
42
01 Safety
ISOFIX lower anchors
Using the ISOFIX lower child seat
anchors
3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX lower
anchors.
NOTE
•
The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX lower anchors.
When installing a child restraint in this
position, attach the restraint's top tether
strap (if it is so equipped) to the top
tether anchorage point and secure the
restraint with the vehicle's center seat
belt.
•
Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use
both ISOFIX lower anchors and top
tethers whenever possible.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
G015268
WARNING
The ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors are
only intended for use with child seats positioned in the outboard seating positions.
These anchors are not certified for use with
any child restraint that is positioned in the
center seating position. When securing a
child restraint in the center seating position,
use only the vehicle's center seat belt.
01
ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors
Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped child
seats are located in the second row, outboard
seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the
anchor positions (see the illustration).
To access the anchors:
1. Put the child restraint in position.
G031682
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by
feel.
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX
lower anchors
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
43
01 Safety
01
ISOFIX lower anchors
WARNING
Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly
to the anchor (see the illustration). If the
attachment is not correctly fastened, the
child restraint may not be properly secured
in the event of a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
44
01 Safety
Top tether anchors
Top tether anchors
WARNING
Be sure to fasten the child tether attachment
correctly to the anchor. If it is not correctly
fastened, the child seat may not be properly
restrained in the event of a collision.
G027032
•
Firmly tension the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Tension the top tether strap
only after the lower anchor straps or the
seat belt have been firmly tensioned.
WARNING
•
Never route a top tether strap over the
top or around the head restraint. It
should always be routed under the head
restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts or harnesses. The
anchorages are not able to withstand
excessive forces on them in the event of
collision if full harness seat belts or adult
seat belts are installed to them. An adult
who uses a belt anchored in a child
restraint anchorage runs a great risk of
suffering severe injuries should a collision occur.
•
Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
interfere with the proper use of the top
tether strap.
For securing the child restraint to ISOFIX lower
anchors,see page 43.
Top tether anchorage points
Your vehicle is equipped with child restraint top
tether anchorages in all second row seat positions (second-row seats only in 7-seat models).
Using the top tether anchorages
•
•
Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
01
Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and fasten its attachment to the
anchorage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
45
01 Safety
01
Child restraint registration and recalls
Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child restraint
to be reached in a recall. To stay informed
about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out
and return the registration card that comes
with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall
information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.
In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child
Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
46
01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion
Integrated booster cushion (option)
over the child's collarbone, not over the child's
neck. If using a booster cushion does not result
in proper positioning of the shoulder strap,
then the child should be placed in a properly
secured child restraint (see page 33 for information). The shoulder belt must never be
placed behind the child's back or under the
arm.
01
WARNING
• Death or serious injury can
occur.
• Follow all instructions on the booster
cushion and in the vehicle's owner's
manual.
• Make sure the booster cushion is securely locked before
the child is seated.
• Use this booster cushion only with chil-
G031071
dren who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs
(15 and 36 kg) and whose height is
between 38 and 54 in (97 and 137 cm).
In Canada, Transport Canada's weight
recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs
(18 - 36 kg).
Volvo's own integrated booster cushion has
been specially designed to help safeguard a
child seated in the rear seat. When using an
integrated booster cushion, the child must be
secured with the vehicle's three-point seat
belt.
•
Use this booster cushion only with children
who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs (15 and
36 kg) and whose height is between 38 and
54 in (97 and 137 cm). In Canada, Transport
Canada's weight recommendation is
40 – 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg).
In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied,
the entire booster cushion and seat belt
must be replaced. The booster cushion
should also be replaced if it is badly
worn or damaged in any way. This work
should be performed by an authorized
Volvo retailer only.
NOTE
The booster cushion is designed to raise the
child higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses
Canada only: This cushion may be referred
to as a built-in booster cushion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
47
01 Safety
01
Integrated booster cushion
G030708
The booster cushion must be pressed down
before the backrest can be folded down.
Raising
1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushion
forward.
2. Move the seat belt latch aside before raising the cushion.
3. With both hands push the cushion rearward.
4. Push the cushion until it locks in place.
Lowering
1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushionforward.
2. Pull the seat forward and press it down
until it locks in place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
48
01 Safety
01
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
49
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
50
52
54
58
60
62
63
65
66
68
70
71
73
75
76
77
78
80
83
85
G020901
Instrument overview................................................................................
Instrument panel.....................................................................................
Information display..................................................................................
Center console controls..........................................................................
Steering wheel adjustment......................................................................
Lighting panel..........................................................................................
Manually unlocking the fuel filler door....................................................
Left-side steering wheel lever.................................................................
Right-side steering wheel lever...............................................................
Hazard warning flashers.........................................................................
Trip computer..........................................................................................
Cruise control..........................................................................................
12-volt sockets........................................................................................
Parking brake..........................................................................................
Hood/tailgate..........................................................................................
Power windows.......................................................................................
Mirrors.....................................................................................................
Power moonroof.....................................................................................
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option).......................................
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
G000000
02
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
52
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
Control panel in the driver's door
Headlights/Parking lights
Horn
Panel vents
Cruise control buttons in steering wheel
Display
Turn signals, High/low beams, READ-button
Parking brake pedal
Odometer/Trip odometer/Cruise control
indicator
Parking brake release handle
Speedometer
Reading lights
Turn signal indicator lights
Courtesy light
Tachometer
Moonroof control (option)
Ambient temperature gauge, clock, gear
indicator
Seat belt reminder
Fuel gauge
Rearview mirror
Indicator and warning symbols
G029570
Temperature gauge
02
Central locking button
Lockout switch for rear seat power windows
Panel vents
Power window controls
Glove compartment
Door mirror controls
Hazard warning flashers
Audio system
Climate system controls
Windshield wiper/washer lever
Audio control buttons in steering wheel
Instrument panel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
53
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
G027133
02
Turn signal indicators – right/left
Text window – The text window displays
information and warning messages.
Temperature gauge – The pointer should
be approximately midway on the gauge
when driving. Do not drive the vehicle if
the warning light is on. The text window
will provide you with additional information. If the engine temperature remains
high, check coolant level – see page 211.
Trip odometer – The trip odometers are
used for measuring shorter distances. The
right-hand digit gives tenth of a mile/kilometer. Press the button for more than
2 seconds to reset. Change between trip
odometers 1 and 2 using one short press
on the button. – The display presents information and warning messages, the ambient temperature, and the clock, etc. When
the ambient temperature is between 23°
and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake
symbol is shown in the display. This symbol serves as a warning for possible slippery road surfaces. Please note that this
symbol does not indicate a fault with your
car. At low speeds, or when the car is not
moving, the temperature readings may be
slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature.
Odometer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
54
Speedometer
Warning symbol
High beam indicator
Tachometer – The tachometer shows
engine speed in thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm). Do not drive continuously
with the needle in the red area of the dial,
which indicates maximum allowable
engine rpm range. Instead, shift to a higher
gear or slow the vehicle down. The engine
management system will automatically
prevent excessively high engines speeds.
This will be noticeable as a pronounced
unevenness in engine speed.
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
Gear and driving mode indicator – The currently selected driving mode is displayed
here. If you use the Geartronic function on
the automatic transmission, the currently
selected gear will be displayed.
Clock/set button – Turn the button to set
the clock.
Fuel gauge – see page 265 for fuel tank
volume. When the warning light in the
gauge comes on, the vehicle should be
refueled as soon as possible. The trip computer section (see page 71) provides
more information on fuel level and consumption.
Indicator and warning symbols – The indicator and warning symbols1light up when
you turn the ignition key to the driving position (position II) before starting.
1
This symbol shines as a red or yellow light depending on the severity
of the discovered fault.
G027134
Ambient temperature gauge – This display
indicates the air temperature outside your
vehicle. A "snowflake" symbol in the text
window is displayed when the temperature
is in the range of 23 – 36 °F (–5 – +2 °C).
Please note that this symbol does not indicate a fault with your vehicle. At low
speeds or when the vehicle is not moving,
the temperature readings may be slightly
higher than the actual ambient temperature.
Warning symbol in center of the
instrument panel
This shows that the symbols are functioning.
When the engine starts, all symbols go out. If
the engine is not started within 5 seconds, all
symbols except CHECK ENGINE and
go out. Certain symbols may not
have their functions illustrated, depending on
the vehicle's equipment. The symbol for the
parking brake goes out when the parking brake
is released.
02
Red symbol – Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible in a suitable location and read the
message shown in the text window. The symbol and accompanying text will remain on until
the fault has been corrected.
Yellow symbol – Follow the instructions
shown in the text window. The text can be
erased by pressing the READ button (see
page 58), or will disappear automatically after
two minutes.
NOTE
When the message TIME FOR REGULAR
SERVICE is displayed, the text can be
erased and the yellow symbol light can be
turned off by pressing the READ button.
The text will disappear and the symbol light
will go out automatically after two minutes.
On certain engines, the symbol for low oilpressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 209.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
55
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
Seat belt reminder
This symbol lights up to indicate
that the driver has not fastened his/
her seat belt.
02
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
If this light comes on while the
vehicle is being driven, or remains
on for longer than approximately
10 seconds after the vehicle has
been started, the SRS system's
diagnostic functions have detected a fault in a
seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag,
side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.
Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
BRAKE – Brake failure warning light
If the light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately, open the hood and check
the brake fluid level in the reservoir. see
page 212.
Canadian models are equipped
with this warning light.
2
If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come
on at the same time, this could indicate a
fault in the brake system.
•
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place and
switch off the engine.
•
•
Restart the engine.
•
If both lights are still on after the engine has
been restarted, switch off the engine again
and check the brake fluid level (see
page 212 for the location of the brake fluid
reservoir).
This light will be on when the parking brake
(hand brake) is applied. The parking brake
pedal is located on the left side of the driver's
footwell, see page 75 for more information.
Canadian models are equipped
with this symbol.
If both warning lights go off, no further
action is required.
If the brake fluid level is above the MIN mark,
drive carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake system
inspected.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a Brake failure – Service
urgent message is displayed in the text
window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system
inspected.
Oil pressure warning light2
If the light comes on while driving, stop the vehicle and then
stop the engine immediately and
check the engine oil level, see
page 58. If the light stays on after
restart, have the vehicle towed to the nearest
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
After hard driving, the light may come on occasionally when the engine is idling. This is normal, provided it goes off when the engine
speed is increased.
Generator warning light
On certain engines, the symbol for low oilpressure is not used. Instead, a text warningis provided in the information display, see page 58.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
56
PARK BRAKE Parking brake applied
If the light comes on while the
engine is running, have the charging system checked.
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
Rear fog light
This light indicates that the fog
light is on.
CHECK ENGINE Malfunction indicator
light
On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII): As you drive,
a computer called "OBDII" monitors your vehicle's engine, transmission, electrical and emission systems. The CHECK ENGINE light will
light up if the computer senses a condition that
potentially may need correcting. When this
happens, please have your vehicle checked by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible.
A CHECK ENGINE light may have many causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a change
in your vehicle's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt fuel economy,
emission cleanliness, and driveability.
Extended driving without correcting the cause
could even damage other components in your
vehicle.
Canadian models are equipped
with this warning light.
ABS (Anti-lock brake system)
If the warning light comes on, there
is a malfunction of the ABS system
(the standard braking system will
still function). The vehicle should
be driven to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for inspection. See
page 143 for additional information.
02
DSTC system
The Dynamic Stability and Traction
Control system (DSTC) is
explained in greater detail on page
145.
Tire pressure monitoring light
See page 190 for more information on this function.
Turn signal indicator – trailer (certain
models)
If you are towing a trailer, this light
will flash simultaneously with the
turn signals on the trailer. If the
light does not flash when signaling,
neither the trailer's turn signals nor
the vehicle's turn signals are functioning.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
57
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
Message in the text windows
When a warning light in the instrument panel
comes on, a message is also displayed in the
text window. After you have read the message,
you can erase it by pressing button A (see illustration).
02
NOTE
function of your choice. Press button A to erase
the warning message.
You can scroll through the stored messages by
pressing button A (see illustration). The text
window can be cleared (the message will be
returned to memory) by pressing button A
again.
G026979
Certain messages cannot be erased until
the condition has been corrected.
If a warning message is displayed when e.g.
you are using the trip computer, this message
must be erased before you can access the
Message
Meaning
STOP SAFELY
Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.
STOP ENGINE
Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.
SERVICE URGENT
Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection immediately.
SEE MANUAL
Refer to your owner's manual. For additional information, please contact your Volvo retailer.
SERVICE REQUIRED
Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection at your convenience
(but preferably before the next scheduled maintenance service).
FIX NEXT SERVICE
Have the system affected inspected at the next scheduled maintenance service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
58
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
A
B
Message
Meaning
TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE
This message will be displayed at 7,500 mile (12,000 km) intervals, after 750 hours of driving or after
12 months, whichever occurs first, to remind the driver that the service interval has been exceeded. The
message will be displayed for 2 minutes each time the vehicle is started until reset by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
OIL LEVEL LOW – FILL OILA
Check the oil level and top up if necessary, see page 209.
OIL LEVEL LOW – STOP SAFELYB
Stop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, see
page 209.
OIL LEVEL LOW – STOP ENGINEB
Stop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, see
page 209.
OIL LEVEL LOW – SEE MANUALB
Stop as soon as possible and switch off the engine, check the oil level and top up if necessary, see
page 209.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF
The stability system's spin control function has been turned off, see page 145 for details.
02
The yellow warning symbol also lights up (see page 54).
The red warning symbol also lights up (see page 54).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
59
02 Instruments and controls
Center console controls
G026944
02
Active Bi-Xenon headlights (ABL) –
option
The beams of ABL headlights
adjust laterally to help light up a
curve according to movements
of the steering wheel when the
vehicle is turning. This function
is activated automatically when
the engine is started and can be deactivated/
reactivated by pressing the button. The indicator light in the button is on when the function is
activated, also see page 63.
Rear seat air conditioning (option)
This button controls the
optional rear seat air conditioning system on seven-seat models.
Press the button and release it
to fold the door mirrors in or
out. On certain models, when
the button is pressed, there
may be a long pause before the
mirrors move. Pressing the button again during this pause may erase your first
button press. If this happens, wait ten seconds
and press the button one more time.
The mirrors cannot be adjusted during the first
ten seconds after they have been folded out.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
60
Folding door mirrors (option)
02 Instruments and controls
Center console controls
Auxiliary lights
NOTE
This button is used to switch on
auxiliary lights (if installed). A
light in the button will light up to
indicate that the auxiliary lights
are illuminated.
If the door mirrors have been inadvertently
pushed out of position (in a car wash, parking lot, etc.) manually return them to normal
position. If mirror adjustment does not seem
to operate after manual folding, reset the
folding mirrors as follows:
•
•
Turn the ignition key to position II.
•
•
Press the button to fold both mirrors in.
12 volt socket
This 12 volt socket can be used
to plug in certain accessories
such as cellular telephones,
etc. The ignition key must be in
position I (or higher) for the auxiliary socket to function.
Manually fold the mirror(s) to the normal
position.
Press the button again to fold the mirrors out to their normal position.
Park Assist (option/accessory as
available)
This system provides an audible warning when the vehicle is
being parked or if it is driven
close to a person or object. For
more information see
page 147.
02
NOTE
The auxiliary sockets can also be used for
cigarette lighters, which are available as
accessories at your Volvo retailer.
Power child locks (option)
For more information on this
function, see page 124.
NOTE
The system activates automatically when
the engine is started, and can be deactivated by pressing this button (e.g. when
towing a trailer) or reactivated if necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
61
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment
G026999
02
Both the height and the reach of the steering
wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position for the driver. Pull down the lever on the
left of the steering column. Adjust the steering
wheel to a suitable position and press the lever
back into place to lock the steering wheel in the
new position. Check that the steering wheel is
locked in the new position.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
62
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
Parking lights
NOTE
The front and rear parking lights can be turned
on even when the ignition is switched off.
•
Turn switch (1) to position
.
The license plate lights also illuminate when the
parking lights are switched on.
Headlights
G027132
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
3501866m
Headlight/parking light switch
Front fog lights
Rear fog light
Active Bi-XenonŸ headlights*: Turn the
headlight switch to position 0 to activate a
daylight sensor, which automatically
switches the low beams on or off, depending on ambient light conditions. When driving in daylight, the headlights will switch off
and the daytime running lights will come on.
In darkness, the daytime running lights will
switch off and the Active Bi-XenonŸ headlights will switch on.
02
2. The low beam headlights (daytime running
lights) illuminate automatically, except
when the light switch (1) is in position
1.
For information on switching between high and
low beams, see page 66.
Instrument panel lighting
G020789
Fuel filler door unlock button
Active Bi-XenonŸ headlight beams
1
On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position.
``
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
Active Bi-XenonŸ headlights (ABL)—
option
•
•
When the ABL function is activated, the headlight beams adjust laterally to help light up a
curve according to movements of the steering
wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).
An indicator light in the button illuminates when
the rear fog light is on.
Turn the ignition key to position II.
Unlocking the fuel filler door
Press button (3) to turn on the rear fog light.
Press button (5) when the vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note
that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until
the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible
click will be heard when the fuel filler door
relocks.
NOTE
The rear fog light is considerably brighter
than the normal tail lights and should be
used only when conditions such as fog, rain,
snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for
other vehicles to less than 500 ft.
(150 meters).
This function is activated automatically when
the engine is started and can be deactivated/
reactivated by pressing the ABL button (see
page 60.
Fog lights
Front fog lights (option)
Instrument panel lighting
The front fog lights can be used in combination
with either the headlights or the parking lights.
The instrument panel lighting illuminates when
the ignition key is in position II and the light
•
•
switch (1) is in either position
Turn the ignition key to position II.
Press button (2) to turn on the front fog
lights.
An indicator light in the button illuminates when
the front fog lights are on.
.
•
Move the thumb wheel (4) up to increase
brightness or down to decrease brightness.
Rear fog light
The single rear fog light is located in the driver's
side of the vehicle.
The rear fog light will only function in combination with the high/low beam headlights or the
optional front fog lights.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
64
or
NOTE
If the fuel filler door does not unlock after the
button has been pressed, drive the vehicle
at a speed of at least 5 mph (8 km/h), stop
the vehicle, and press the button again.
For information on unlocking the fuel filler door
manually, see page 65.
02 Instruments and controls
Manually unlocking the fuel filler door
G027077
02
Panel on passenger's side of cargo area
6. Move the catch (6) rearward to unlock the
fuel filler door lock, or move it forward to
lock the filler door.
To manually unlock the fuel filler door
1. Open the upper and lower sections of the
tailgate, and fold up the rear section of the
cargo area floor.
2. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
grocery bag holder, detach the holder's
bands.
3. Remove the corner panel from the floor of
the cargo area.
G027034
4. Open the cover in the side panel by pulling
the tab upward/outward.
5. Pull down the insulating material (4) to
access the fuel filler door motor (5).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
65
02 Instruments and controls
Left-side steering wheel lever
Lever positions
02
Turn signals
High/low beam headlights
When turning
Continuous high beams
Move the lever as far up or down as possible
(to position 2) to start the turn signals. The turn
signals will be cancelled automatically by the
movement of the steering wheel, or the lever
can be returned to its initial position by hand.
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
When changing lanes
G026954
The driver can automatically flash the turn signals 3 times by:
, (see page 63) pull the turn signal
lever toward the steering wheel (position 4)
to toggle between high and low beams
(this also applies on models equipped with
the optional Active Bi-XenonŸ headlights).
•
Moving the turn signal lever up or down to
position (1) and releasing it.
High beam flash
•
Moving the lever up or down to position (2)
and immediately back to its original position.
2. Pull the turn signal lever to position (3). The
high beams will remain on until the lever is
released.
Turn signals, lane change position
Turn signals, position for normal turns
High beam flash
2. With the light switch (1) in position
Home safe lighting
NOTE
•
This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving
the lever in the opposite direction.
•
If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, check for a burned-out
turn signal bulb.
Toggle between high and low beams,
Home Safe lighting
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
When you leave your vehicle at night, you can
make use of the home safe lighting function to
illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far as
possible towards the steering wheel (to
position 4) and release it.
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
The headlights and parking lights will illuminate
and remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. The
1
Factory setting
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
66
02 Instruments and controls
Left-side steering wheel lever
time interval can be changed by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
02
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
67
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
Windshield wipers
Intermittent wiper function
With the lever in this position, you
can set the wiper interval by twisting the control ring 1 upward to
increase wiper speed or downward to decrease the speed.
02
•
When approximately 1 US quart (1 liter)
remains in the washer fluid reservoir, the
headlights will not be washed when the
lever is pulled to conserve washer fluid for
the windshield.
Continuous wiper function
Windshield washer/headlight washer
(certain models)
G026953
When the lever is pulled to wash the windshield, high pressure jets mounted in the
bumper will spray the headlights.
CAUTION
Top arrow: normal speed
•
Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield to avoid scratching the
glass. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation.
Bottom arrows: higher speed
•
Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen in place.
Thumb wheel
Rain sensor on/off
Windshield wipers off
If the lever is in the 0 position and
you move it upwards, the wipers
will sweep one stroke at a time for
as long as you hold the lever up.
•
To conserve washer fluid in driving conditions where the windshield washers are
used frequently, the headlights will only be
washed once for every five times the windshield is washed within a 10-minute period.
•
A short pull on the lever will wash the windshield only.
Single sweep position
Move the lever slightly upward
from the 0 position for one sweep
of the wipers. The lever returns
automatically to 0 when released.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
68
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
Tailgate wiper/washer
Tailgate wiper and reverse gear
If the front wipers are on and the transmission
is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper will
go into intermittent wiping function1.
If the tailgate wiper is already in normal wiping
function, the normal wiping function will continue.
G027127
Rain sensor (option)
Intermittent wiping: Press the upper
section of the switch
Neutral position: The wiper is switched
off
Normal (continuous) wiping: Press the
lower section of the switch
Move the lever forward to start the tailgate
washer. After washing the rear window, the
wiper will make several additional sweeps.
The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper
speed according to the amount of water on the
windshield.
The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted
by twisting ring 1 up (the wipers will sweep the
windshield more frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the windshield less frequently).
•
Move the windshield wiper lever down to
another position. Moving the lever up will
not deactivate the rain sensor. Doing so
will cause the wipers to sweep the windshield until the lever is released, at which
time the wipers return to rain sensor mode.
02
The rain sensor is also deactivated when the
key is removed from the ignition.
CAUTION
The rain sensor should be deactivated when
washing the vehicle in an automatic car
wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left
on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the
car wash and could be damaged.
Activating the rain sensor:
1. Turn the ignition key to at least position I
and put the windshield wiper lever in position 0.
2. Press button (2).
> A light in the button will light up to indicate that the rain sensor is active.
Deactivating the rain sensor:
•
Press button (2).
or
1
Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
69
02 Instruments and controls
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers
Rear window and door mirror defroster
Press the switch to start heating the rear window and door
mirrors to remove ice or condensation. A light in the switch
will light up.
02
A timer automatically switches off the heating
after approximately 12 minutes. The LED will
go out correspondingly.
CD
LUM
VO E
AM FM
POWER
*
3
DEF
5
6
JKL
MNO
8
9
TUV WXYZ
0
#
G027096
2
ABC
1
4
GHI
7
PQRS
The four-way flasher should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic hazard. To activate the flashers, press the triangular button in the center dash. Press the button
again to turn off the flashers.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of the hazard
warning flasher may vary, depending on
where you live.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
70
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
Trip computer (option)
•
Current speed in mph (Canadian models
only)
of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank when the reading was taken.
•
DSTC (see page 145 for detailed information)
When "----" is displayed in the text window,
refuel as soon as possible.
3. Average fuel consumption
G026956
NOTE
READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/
erase a message)
Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip
computer menus)
RESET
The trip computer stores information gathered
from several systems in your vehicle and has
four menus that can be displayed in the text
window.
•
•
•
•
Driving distance on current fuel reserve
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
Average speed
02
Warning messages from the vehicle's monitoring systems will override the trip computer function. If a warning message is
displayed in the text window while you are
using the trip computer, you must acknowledge the message by pressing button A.
Press button A again to return to the trip
computer function.
1. Trip computer controls and functions
The trip computer functions can be accessed
by twisting INFO (B) one step at a time in either
direction. Twisting a final time returns you to
the original function.
The trip computer can be reset (current data
will be erased from system memory) by pressing RESET (button C).
2. Driving distance on current fuel
reserve
This value indicates fuel consumption since the
last time the trip computer was reset (by pressing RESET, button C). When the engine is
switched off, information on fuel consumption
is stored and remains in system memory until
the RESET (button C) is pressed again.
4. Current fuel consumption
This value indicates the current fuel consumption, based on readings taken once per second. When the vehicle is not moving, "----" will
be displayed.
5. Average speed
This value indicates average speed since the
last time the trip computer was reset (by pressing RESET, button C). When the engine is
switched off, information on average speed is
stored and remains in system memory until the
RESET (button C) is pressed again.
This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank. The calculation is based on average fuel
consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
71
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
02
6. Current speed in miles per hour
(Canadian models only)
This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the vehicle's current
speed from km/h to mph.
NOTE
Trip computer readings may vary slightly
depending on the circumference of the tires
on the vehicle and driving style.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
72
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control
Engaging the cruise control function
Increasing or decreasing speed
Braking
•
Cruise control is automatically disengaged
when the brake pedal is depressed. The
currently set speed is stored in memory.
•
Pressing resume
will return the vehicle
to the previously set speed.
02
The cruise control panel is located on the left
side of the steering wheel hub.
NOTE
This does not set the vehicle's speed.
1. Press the CRUISE button.
> CRUISE will be displayed in the information window in the instrument panel.
2. Press + or – to set the current speed.
> CRUISE-ON will be displayed in the
information window in the instrument
panel.
G027139
G027098
Acceleration
Use + or – in the following ways to increase or
decrease the vehicle's speed:
1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed.
2. Press + or – for approximately a half second and release the button to increase or
decrease vehicle speed by approximately
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE
Cruise control will not function at speeds
below 20 mph. (30 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Momentary acceleration, such as when passing another vehicle, does not affect cruise control operation. The vehicle will automatically
return to the previously set speed when you
release the accelerator pedal.
Disengaging cruise control
To disengage cruise control, press the
CRUISE button. CRUISE or CRUISE-ON will
no longer be displayed in the information window in the instrument panel.
NOTE
Cruise control is automatically disengaged
if:
•
•
•
•
the engine is switched off
•
if the vehicle's speed falls below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
the gear selector is placed in (N) Neutral
the wheels start to spin or lock
if an increase in speed is maintained for
more than one minute
``
73
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control
02
Temporarily disengaging the cruise
control
1. Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruise
control.
> CRUISE will be displayed in the information window in the instrument panel.
2. Press the brake pedal.
Press "resume"
set speed.
to return to the previously
WARNING
Cruise control should not be used in heavy
traffic or when driving on wet or slippery
roads, or when driving on unpaved or
uneven road surfaces. Cruise control may
not maintain set speed on steep downgrades.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
74
02 Instruments and controls
12-volt sockets
These 12 volt sockets can be used to plug in
certain accessories such as cellular telephones, etc.
02
The ignition key must be in at least position I
for the sockets in the front seat and the optional
socket at the rear of the center console to function.
12-volt socket in the cargo compartment
NOTE
•
If the 12-volt sockets are used while the
engine is not running, there is a risk that
the vehicle's battery will be discharged.
•
If the ignition is switched off and a
device drawing more than 0.1 A is connected to a socket, a battery warning
will be displayed in the text window.
•
The covers should be kept on when the
auxiliary sockets are not in use.
•
Maximum current from the sockets is
15 A.
12-volt socket at the rear of the center console
(option)
G027099
G028425
Fold down the lid to use the socket. This socket
can be used even if the ignition is switched off.
12-volt socket in the cargo compartment
Ashtrays/cigarette lighter
The auxiliary sockets can also be used for cigarette lighters.
Ashtrays and lighters are available as accessories. Please contact your Volvo retailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
75
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
02
4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake pedal
must be pushed down more firmly.
5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear
selector in P.
G026992
Parking on a hill
•
If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the
curb.
•
If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
Parking brake pedal
Releasing the parking brake
Handle for releasing the parking brake
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
The parking brake pedal is located under the
dashboard, to the left of the brake pedal.
2. Pull handle 2.
NOTE
NOTE
The indicator light will light up even if the
parking brake has only been partiallyapplied.
If you inadvertently pull the plastic cover 2 ,
it can be pressed back into place.
WARNING
When applying the parking brake
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
Press down the parking brake pedal firmly
to its full extent.
2. Press down pedal 1 firmly to its full extent.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
76
02 Instruments and controls
Hood/tailgate
Opening/closing the hood
To fold down the lower section of the tailgate,
pull handle (B) upward.
G026995
WARNING
•
Do not grasp the ribs in the grille when
closing the hood. If your fingers protrude through the grille, they could be
injured on components in the engine
compartment as the grille closes. We
recommend pressing down on the hood
to close it.
•
Check that the hood locks properly
when closed!
02
Opening the tailgate
Opening the hood
1. Pull the lever (1) located under the left side
of the dashboard to release the hood lock.
2. Lift the hood slightly.
3. Press up the release control (2) located
under the front edge of the hood and lift.
G027005
To close the hood, place your hand on it and
press down until the hood locks in the closed
position.
To open the upper section of the tailgate, pull
the handle (A) downward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
77
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
Power windows
WARNING
The power windows are controlled by buttons
in the arm rests. The ignition switch must be
ON1 (ignition key in position I, II or the engine
running) for the electrically operated windows
to function.
Always remove the ignition key when the
vehicle is unattended.
Make sure that the windows are completely
unobstructed before they are operated.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
To lower: Press down the front edge of the button to the first detent ("stop").
To raise: Lightly pull up the front edge of the
button to the first detent ("stop").
G029571
NOTE
Auto up/down function (front doors only):
Either front door window can be opened or
closed automatically.
Auto down: Press the front part of the button
as far down as possible and release it immediately. To stop the window at any time, pull the
button up.
Auto up: Pull the front part of the button up as
far as possible and release it immediately. To
stop the window at any time, press the button
down.
1
Power window controls
Front windows
Rear windows
NOTE
If a window is obstructed during auto-up, it
will automatically reverse direction and
return to its starting position. If a window is
repeatedly obstructed during auto-up operation, an overload protection circuit breaker
will temporarily halt window function. The
window will return to normal function after a
brief cool-down period.
The power windows will also function after the ignition has been switched off as long as neither of the front doors has been opened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
78
To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear
windows are opened, also open the front
windows slightly.
G029572
02
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
Lockout switch for rear windows
The power rear door windows can be disabled
by a switch located on the driver's door (see
illustration).
02
If the light in the switch is OFF: The rear door
windows can be raised or lowered with the
buttons on the rear door armrests or with the
buttons on the driver's door armrest.
G029574
If the light in the switch is ON: The rear door
windows can only be raised or lowered with the
buttons on the driver's door armrest.
Power windows in the rear doors
G029573
The rear door windows can be operated with
the control on each door and the switch on the
driver's door. If the light in the switch for blocking power windows in the rear doors (located
in the driver's door control panel) is on, the rear
door windows can only be operated from the
driver's door.
Power window on the front passenger's
side
The control for the power window in the front
passenger's seat operates that window only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
79
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
Rearview mirror
NOTE
This function is automatically switched off
when the gear selector is placed in the
Reverse position.
02
G026660
Rearview mirror with compass (option)
or when the engine is running. The compass
can be switched off or on by pressing the inset
button on the rear side of the mirror (see the
inset illustration). This can be done with
straightened paperclip or similar object. The
button is recessed approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in the mirror.
G026965
Normal position
Night position, reduces glare from following headlights
Autodim function (option)
The autodim function reacts to headlights from
following traffic and automatically reduces
glare.
The upper left-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction toward which the car is
pointing. Eight different directions can be displayed: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The
display shows your car's orientation with
respect to true north.
If the compass is activated, it will be displayed
automatically when the ignition is in postilion II
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
80
G026409
To reduce glare from the headlights of following vehicles, use the control to switch between
the normal and night-driving positions.
Magnetic zones
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is initially set for the zone to
which the car was delivered, and should
always be adjusted if the car is driven to a new
magnetic zone. To do so:
1. Switch the ignition to position II.
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
3. Press the button repeatedly until the number for the desired zone (1 – 15) is displayed.
02
2. Turn off as many electrical devices in the
car as possible to avoid interference with
the compass (e.g. audio system, etc).
3. Using a pen or similar object, hold the button (1) depressed for at least 6 seconds.
"CAL" will be displayed.
NOTE
This step can also be done by driving normally until CAL is no longer displayed.
C
A
L
Power door mirrors
1. Stop the car in a large, open area, away
from traffic.
4. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speed
of 5 m.p.h. (8 km/h) until CAL is no longer
displayed.
Z
O
N
E
C
A
L
Calibrating the compass
Z
O
N
E
G026950
Calibration is complete.
G029575
2. Press the button on the rear side of the
mirror with straightened paperclip or similar object for approximately 3 seconds until
ZONE is displayed. The number of the current magnetic zone will also be displayed.
The mirror control switches are located on the
driver's door armrest.
Driver's side: Press the L button (a light in the
switch will light up) to activate the adjustment
control and then use this control to adjust the
driver's door mirror.
Passenger's door: Press the R button (a light
in the switch will light up) and then use the
adjustment control to adjust the passenger's
door mirror.
Calibrating the compass
After several seconds, the compass heading
will again be displayed, and the change of
magnetic zones is complete.
After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press the
L or R switch again (the light will go out) to
deactivate the adjustment control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
81
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
For information about the optional folding mirror function see page 60.
02
WARNING
CAUTION
Use the heating function to remove ice,
snow, or mist from the mirrors.
The mirrors should always be adjusted prior
to driving. Objects seen in the passenger's
side wide-angle door mirror are closer than
they appear to be.
Mirror memory function (with the central
locking system)–option
If you lock the vehicle and later unlock it with
the same remote control and open the driver's
door, the door mirrors (and the driver's seat)
will automatically move to the position they
were in when you left the vehicle. This feature
will work in the same way with all of the remote
control transmitters (up to 3) that you use with
your vehicle. This feature will not function if you
lock your vehicle with the key.
Water repellent glass
The side door mirrors can be treated
with a water repellent coating. The
symbol to the left indicates these windows
have this coating.
The coating improves vision by causing the
water to run off quickly.
For information on cleaning this type of glass,
see page 196.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
82
02 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof
Power moonroof
Auto open: Pull the switch as far back as possible (position 4) and release it to automatically
slide open the moonroof to the "comfort"1
position. Pull the switch rearward again to
open the moonroof completely.
02
G007503
G027010
Manual close: Push the switch to position 2
and hold it until the moonroof has closed completely or to the position of your choice.
Tilt position
To operate the moonroof, turn the ignition key
to position I or II, or start the engine. The moonroof can be operated in two ways:
Tilt position
Sliding moonroof
Open: With the moonroof closed, push up the
rear edge of the switch (position 5 in the illustration in the center column).
Close: Pull down and hold the rear edge of the
switch (position 6 in the illustration in the center
column) until the moonroof has closed completely.
Auto close: Push the switch forward as far as
possible (position 1) and release it to automatically close the moonroof.
CAUTION
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the moonroof.
•
Do not operate the moonroof if it is frozen closed.
•
Never place heavy objects on the
moonroof.
Sliding moonroof
Manual open: Pull the switch rearward to position 3 and hold it until the moonroof has
opened to the position of your choice.
1
A position where the moonroof is not quite fully open, which helps alleviate "rumbling" wind noise.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
83
02 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof
•
Never open/close the moonroof it is
obstructed in any way when in operation.
•
Never allow a child to operate the
moonroof.
•
Never extend any object or body part
through the open moonroof, even if the
vehicle's ignition is completely
switched off.
•
Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
If the moonroof is obstructed during auto-close
operation, it will automatically reverse direction
and return to its starting position. If the moonroof is repeatedly obstructed during auto-close
operation, an overload circuit breaker will temporarily halt moonroof function. The moonroof
will return to normal function after a brief cooldown period.
G020157
WARNING
02
Sun visor
The optional moonroof also features a sliding
sun visor. The visor slides open automatically
when the moonroof is opened. The visor must
be closed manually.
WARNING
The moonroof must never be obstructed in
any way when in operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
84
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
Introduction
G030070
WARNING
The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink information can be found on
the Internet at www.homelink.com.
•
If you use HomeLink to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion.
•
When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage.
•
Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards. For more information,
contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF device
you are programming for use in other vehicles
as well as for future HomeLink programming. It
is also suggested that upon the sale of the
vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing
HomeLink Buttons”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Programming HomeLink
NOTE
02
Some vehicles may require the ignition
switch to be turned on or to the second
(“accessories”) position for programming
and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator
light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
``
85
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
NOTE
02
Some devices may require you to replace
this Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming” section. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these steps,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press
and hold the just-trained HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
•
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with “Programming” steps 4-6 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped
device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motorhead unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”
or “smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.) There
are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold
for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence a second
time, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Programming” pro-
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
86
cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”
step 2 with the following:
•
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release every two seconds (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to complete.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will
now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage
door opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For
convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the
event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash-after 10 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 20 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at
any time beginning with “Programming” step 1.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained, follow
these steps:
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
02
NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
device.1
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with “Programming”
- step 1.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
1
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
87
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
88
G020906
Climate control system – general information........................................ 90
Air distribution......................................................................................... 92
Electronic climate control (ECC)............................................................. 93
CLIMATE
03
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
03 Climate
Climate control system – general information
Condensation on the inside of the
windows
Sensors
Acceleration
Keeping the insides of the windows clean will
help reduce the amount of condensation that
forms on the windows. Use a commercial window cleaning agent to clean the windows.
The sunlight sensor on the dashboard and passenger compartment temperature sensor in
the ECC control panel should not be covered
in any way as this could cause incorrect information to be sent to the ECC system.
The air conditioning is momentarily disengaged during full-throttle acceleration.
Ice and snow
Parking the vehicle in warm weather
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.
If your vehicle has been parked in the sun in
warm weather, opening the windows and
moonroof (option) for several minutes before
driving will help release the warm air from the
passenger compartment. When the engine is
running, close the windows and moonroof and
use the recirculation function for several
minutes to enable the air conditioning to cool
the compartment as quickly as possible.
03
Cabin air filter
Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to
your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, or consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for these intervals.
The filter should be replaced more often when
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should
always be replaced with a new one.
Windows and optional moonroof
The ECC system will function best if the windows and optional moonroof are closed. If you
drive with the moonroof open, we recommend
that you manually adjust the temperature and
blower control (the LED in the AUTO switch
should be off).
Climate control maintenance
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
system. Work of this type should only be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Refrigerant
Volvo cares about the environment. The air
conditioning system in your vehicle contains a
CFC-free refrigerant – R134a (HFC134a). This
substance will not deplete the ozone layer. The
approximate amount of R134a contained in the
system is a follows:
6-cylinder engine
Single A/C system: 1.4 lbs (700 g)
Dual1 A/C system: 2.2 lbs (1000 g)
8-cylinder engine
Single A/C system: 1.5 lbs (700 g)
Dual1 A/C system: 2.3 lbs (1050 g)
The system also uses PAG oil.
1
Includes the optional rear A/C system
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
90
03 Climate
Climate control system – general information
Climate system blower
The climate system blower will be automatically switched off when the engine is not running (even if the ignition key is in position I or
II) to avoid unnecessary battery drain. To activate the blower, turn the control to the desired
setting.
The climate system blower may start automatically during a period of up to approximately
50 minutes after the ignition has been turned
off to remove condensation in the A/C evaporator. It will run for 15 minutes and switch off
automatically.
The following points pertain if the ignition is on
but the engine in not running:
•
To restart the blower, turn the control knob
to the setting of your choice.
•
After approximately 2 minutes, the blower
speed will be reduced to avoid battery
drain.
You can reset the blower speed at any time.
Please be aware that the system has been
designed to reduce the blower's speed again
after 2 minutes, until the engine is started.
If the battery becomes drained:
•
LOW BATTERY, FAN IS REDUCED will
be displayed in the text window in the
instrument panel.
•
The yellow warning light in the instrument
panel (see page 54) will also light up.
Passenger compartment blower
Approximately 50 minutes after the ignition is
turned off, the blower may come on automatically, and run for seven minutes, to remove
condensation in the A/C evaporator.
03
Blower function to reduce battery drain
The climate system's blower functions normally while the engine is running.
However, when the engine is switched off
(even if the ignition is switched to positions I or
II), the blower control will be automatically
switched off to avoid unnecessary battery
drain.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
91
03 Climate
Air distribution
Air distribution
The incoming air is distributed through the ventilation points in the passenger compartment
shown above.
Air vents in the dash
Open
Closed
Closed
Horizontal air flow
Horizontal air flow
Vertical air flow
Vertical air flow
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
G027064
Air vents in the door pillars
Open
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.
92
0
G027043
G027044
03
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.
03 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC)
Overview
G027046
03
AC – (ON/OFF)
Temperature passenger´s side
Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor
(option)
Temperature driver´s side
Blower
Recirculation
Blower control for rear climate system(option)
AUTO
Airdistribution
Passenger compartment temperature sensor
Functions
Rear window and door mirrors defroster
Heated front seats(option)
Press the switch to turn the air conditioning on
or off. The "ON" or "OFF" LED will light up to
indicate if the system is switched on or off.
Other functions will still be regulated automatically (if the AUTO switch is on).
Interior air quality sensor (option)
A/C – ON/OFF
•
The air conditioning functions only at temperatures above 32 °F (0 °C).
•
While the Defroster function is selected,
the air conditioning is temporarily activated
to dehumidify the air, even if you have manually switched the air conditioning off. This
Defroster windshield and side windows
will only function if the blower is not
switched off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Some vehicles are equipped with a multifilter
and air quality sensor. The filter separates
gases and particles, thereby reducing the
amounts of odors and contaminants entering
the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects
increased levels of contaminants in the outside
air. When the air quality sensor detects conta``
93
03 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC)
03
When the ECC system is in the AUTO mode,
the green LED will be on.
•
Timer mode deactivation: Press and hold
the recirculation button for 3 seconds. The
amber LED in the recirculation button will
illuminate steadily for 5 seconds to show a
return to "normal" mode.
•
In normal mode, when the recirculation
button is pressed, the climate control system will recirculate the air in the passenger
compartment until the recirculation button
is pressed again.
Recirculation
Press this switch to engage the recirculation
function (air in the passenger compartment
recirculates – no fresh air enters the compartment). The LED in the switch will light up to
indicate that the function is engaged.
•
•
Use this function if the outside air is contaminated with exhaust gases, smoke, etc
or to heat/cool the vehicle quickly.
Recirculation should not be used for more
than 15 minutes. If your windows begin to
fog or mist, make sure that the recirculation
function is switched off.
•
Selecting Defroster automatically
switches recirculation off.
•
Timer mode activation: (Vehicles equipped
with the Interior Air Quality system have no
timer mode) Press and hold the recirculation button for at least 3 seconds to activate a recirculation timer mode. The amber
LED in the recirculation button will flash 5
times to show that the timer mode is being
activated. In timer mode, each time the
•
Timer mode memory: If the vehicle is
turned off while timer mode is active, timer
mode will still be active when the vehicle is
restarted.
AUTO
This function automatically regulates the
Electronic Climate Control system so that
the selected temperatures are maintained.
The blower, heating, air distribution (air
flow), air conditioning, and optional air quality sensor are controlled. If you prefer to manually set any of these functions, the remaining
functions will still be controlled automatically.
Pressing the AUTO button overrides any settings that were previously made manually.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
94
Air distribution
G027267
recirculation button is pressed, the climate
control system will recirculate the air in the
passenger compartment for
5 – 12 minutes, depending on the outside
air temperature, and then revert back to
fresh air.
minated outside air, the air intake closes and
the air inside the passenger compartment is
recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.
Air flow to windows
Air through panel vents
Air through floor vents
Press AUTO to automatically regulate air flow
or press any combination of the controls
shown in the illustration to manually adjust air
flow. An LED in the switch will light up if an air
flow control has been pressed.
Passenger compartment temperature
sensor
Measures the temperature in the compartment.
Defroster
This function defrosts/deices the windshield
and front side windows. The LED in the switch
03 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC)
will light up to indicate that the defrost function
is engaged.
3. Press the switch a third time to turn the
heating off completely. The LED will go off.
•
The seat heating for the passenger seat should
be switched off when the seat is not occupied.
•
Blower speed increases automatically and
the air conditioning will switch on (if not
already on and if the passenger compartment blower is not turned off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment.
Recirculation will not function while defrost
is engaged.
The climate system will return to its previous
settings when the defroster function is
switched off.
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
This function defrosts/deices the rear window
and door mirrors. The LED in the switch will
light up to indicate that the heating function is
engaged. For additional information on this
function see page 70.
Never use ice scrapers made of metal as they
can easily scratch the mirror surface.
Heated front seats (option)
1. Press the switch once for maximum seat
heating. Both LEDs in the switch will be lit.
2. Press the switch a second time for comfort
heating. One LED in the switch will be lit.
1
Temperature
These controls are used to individually set the
temperature for both sides of the passenger
compartment. Please note that the compartment will not be heated or cooled faster by
setting the temperature higher or lower than
necessary.
Set the control to the temperature you prefer.
Blower control1
Turn the control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the blower speed.
Pressing the AUTO switch will automatically
regulate blower speed and override manual
adjustment.
Turning the blower control counterclockwise
until an orange LED comes on will turn both the
blower and the air conditioning off.
Operation
Press to operate the air quality sensor (normal
setting).
or:
Select one of the following three functions by
pressing 1, 2 or 3 times.
2. No LED lights. Recirculation is not activated unless needed to cool the passenger
compartment in a warm climate.
3. The MAN LED lights. Recirculation is now
activated.
Keep in mind the following:
•
Make it a rule to have the air quality sensor
activated at all times.
•
Recirculation is limited in cold climates to
avoid fogging.
•
If window fogging occurs, you should
deactivate the air quality sensor. Also use
the defroster functions for the windshield,
side windows and rear window, see
page 93.
•
The filter should be changed at the intervals recommended in the service schedule. However, if the vehicle is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it may
Blower control for rear climate system
(option)
Turn the control to increase or decrease blower
speed.
03
1. The AUT LED lights. The air quality sensor
is now activated.
See also see page 90.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
95
03 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC)
be necessary to change the filter more frequently.
03
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
96
03 Climate
03
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
97
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
98
100
103
106
108
112
G020908
Front seats............................................................................................
Rear seats.............................................................................................
Interior lighting......................................................................................
Storage compartments.........................................................................
Securing cargo......................................................................................
INTERIOR
04
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
04 Interior
Front seats
Manually adjusted front seats
•
•
WARNING
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.
2. Adjust the backrest to the upright position.
Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
5. Move the seat as far forward as possible
so that the head restraint slides under the
glove compartment.
Folding the backrests in the front seat
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and
move the seat to the position of your
choice.
Operation
G014805
Raise/lower seat height: pump the seat up
or down.
Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer
or softer lumbar support.
Control panel for optional power seat (see
page 100 for more information).
The front passenger seat backrest can be
folded to a horizontal position to make room for
a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
100
WARNING
Power seat – (option on certain
models)
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
cushion (option): use the control to pump
the front edge of the cushion up or down.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the
angle of the backrest.
4. Without releasing the catches, push the
backrest forward.
Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to
help prevent shifting during sudden stops.
G027214
04
3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.
Driver's seat: The seat can be adjusted if the
ignition key is in position I, II or if the engine is
running. It can also be adjusted as follows with
the ignition off:
04 Interior
Front seats
•
•
•
Within several minutes after the driver's
door has been unlocked from the outside,
has been opened, and remains open.
Front edge of seat (raise/lower)
Within a short period if the driver's door has
just been closed.
Rear edge of seat (raise/lower)
Within a short period if the driver's door has
not been opened after the ignition has
been switched off.
Passenger seat: The seat can only be
adjusted if the ignition key is in position I, II or
if the engine is running.
Forward – rearward
Backrest tilt
•
•
Adjust the seat to your preferences.
When you leave your vehicle, lock it using
the remote control.
The position of the seat is now stored in the
remote control.
Automatic seat adjustment
NOTE
The power seats have an overload protector
that activates if a seat is blocked by any
object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition
(key in position 0 ) and wait for a short period
before operating the seat again.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
any of the buttons to stop the seat.
NOTE
To move the seat to the position in which you
left it:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the same
remote control (the one used to lock the
doors)
2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.
The driver's seat will automatically move to the
position in which you left it.
NOTE
•
The seat will move to this position even
if someone else has moved it to a different seating position and locked the
vehicle with a different remote control.
•
This feature will work in the same way
with all of the remote control transmitters (up to 3 ) that you use with your
vehicle.
•
This feature will not function if you lock
your vehicle with the key.
G027036
Please refer to the following page for information on programming the memory function in the driver's seat.
Power seat adjustment controls
Seat adjustment
Adjust the power seat(s) with the two controls
at the side of the seat as follows:
Remote keyless entry system and the
driver's seat
The remote control transmitter also controls
the position of the electrically operated driver's
seat in the following way:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
04
``
101
04 Interior
Front seats
3. With the MEM button depressed, press
button 1 briefly to store the seat's current
position.
WARNING
04
Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on
the power seat control panel.
•
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
•
The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.
To move the seat to the position that it was in
when button 1 was programmed:
Press and hold down button 1 until the seat
stops moving.
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop automatically if the button is released before the
seat has reached the preset position.
The seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.
G027037
•
Programming the memory
Three different seating and door mirror positions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.
The following example explains how button 1
can be programmed. Buttons 2 and 3 can be
programmed in the same way.
To program (store) a seat position in button 1:
1. Move the seat to the desired position using
the seat adjustment controls (see
page 100).
2. Press and hold down the MEM (memory)
button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
102
04 Interior
Rear seats
Entering the optional third row of seats
Removing the center console (sevenseat models only)1
Tilting the outboard backrests in the
second row of seats:
•
Pull up the handle (1), hold it up, and tilt the
backrest forward to move the seat.
•
Return the backrest to the upright position
to slide the seat back to its original position.
Forward/rearward seat adjustment
Lift the adjustment bar (2) to move the seat forward or rearward.
1
G027017
G027027
G027033
04
In order to make it possible to move the center
seat in the second row of seats as far forward
as possible (seven-seat models only), the rear
section of the center console can be removed.
•
Pull the handle (see illustration above) and
lift out the console.
•
To return the console to its original position, slide it back into position until it clicks
into place.
Sliding center seat – second row (sevenseat models only)
The center seat in the second row can be
moved farther forward than the outboard
seats. This makes it possible for a child seated
in this position to sit closer to the people in the
front seats.
The center console cannot be removed on vehicles equipped with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment System.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
103
04 Interior
Rear seats
WARNING
The center rear seat head restraint should
only be in its lowest position when this seat
is NOT occupied. When the center position
is occupied, the head restraint should be
correctly adjusted to the passenger’s
height.
3. Pull the handle (B) outward to release the
backrest. The backrests are designed to
lock at a 45 degree angle. Pull the handle
again to continue pressing it down until it
locks in the horizontal position.
To return the backrests to the upright position,
pull handle B and pull the backrest up.
G027015
04
Head restraint – second row, center
position
To lower – press the button at the base of the
support (see illustration above) and press the
head restraint down.
G027022
To raise – pull the restraint up until it clicks into
one of the four heights positions.
Folding the backrests – second row of
seats
1. Move the seat(s) to their rearmost position
(seven-seat models only).
2. Pull the loop (A) to fold down an outboard
head restraint. Press down the center head
restraint if necessary (see page 104).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
104
G027016
The head restraint in the center position can be
adjusted to 4 different heights.
Folding the backrests – third row of seats
(option)
Folding down the backrest
If necessary, fold in the load anchorage eyelets
before folding down the backrests.
1. Move the seats in the second row as far
forward as possible, see page 103.
04 Interior
Rear seats
2. Pull up the handle, illustration 1 above.
3. Push the seat cushion firmly rearward,
under the backrest.
4. Fold down the backrests2 (the head
restraints fold down automatically) to the
horizontal position.
Returning the backrest to the upright
position
1. Fold up the backrest to the upright position.
04
2. Grasp the strap (see illustration 3 above)
and pull the seat cushion out until it locks
in place. This also locks the backrest in the
upright position.
2
Please note that the head restraints in this row cannot be vertically adjusted.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
105
04 Interior
Interior lighting
The courtesy lights come on automatically1
and remain on for approximately 30 seconds
when:
Reading lights and courtesy light
•
The vehicle has been unlocked from the
outside with the remote control or key
•
If the engine has been switched off and the
ignition key has been turned to position 0
The courtesy lights will come on and remain on
for approximately 10 minutes when:
•
Driver's side rear reading light
Courtesy lights
Passenger's side rear reading light The
rear reading lights can be switched on and
off by pressing buttons (4) or (5).
Automatic function
The reading lights and courtesy lights will
switch off automatically approximately
10 minutes after the engine has been turned
off. The lights can be turned off sooner by
pressing the respective buttons.
This function is light dependent and is only activated in dark conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
106
One of the doors is opened (assuming the
courtesy lighting has not previously been
switched off)
The courtesy lighting will go off when:
Rear reading lights
Driver's side front reading lamp
Passenger's side front reading lamp The
reading lights can be switched on or off by
pressing buttons 1 or 3. The courtesy lighting (including footwell lighting) can be
turned on or off by pressing button 2. This
also activates the automatic function.
1
G027153
G026960
04
•
•
The engine is started
The vehicle is locked from the outside with
the remote control or key
The automatic function can be disconnected
by pressing button (2) for more than 3 seconds.
Briefly pressing the button again automatically
reconnects the function.
The courtesy light timer periods can be
changed. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
Vanity mirror
G027045
04
The light comes on when you open the cover.
Glove compartment lighting
The light in the glove compartment comes on
or switches off when its door is opened or
closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
107
04 Interior
Storage compartments
G033089
04
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
108
04 Interior
Storage compartments
Storage compartment in optional third row
of seats
Storage compartment in the center
console
Storage compartment
Glove compartment
Storage compartment in center console
Rear seat cup holders
Storage pocket (also in front edge of front
seats)
04
G027020
Grocery bag holder
G027019
WARNING
Make sure that no hard, sharp or heavy
objects lie on or in any of the storage areas
where they might cause injury during sudden braking.
To open the lid on the storage compartment,
press the lower edge of the opening latch (see
illustration above). This lid can be folded back
to form a small table area for rear seat passengers.
Lift the tray under the lid to expose the deep
storage bin with slots for CD storage.
Cup holders for the front seats
Two cup holders are provided for the front seat
occupants. Press lightly on the rear edge of the
cover to open it.
Ashtray (accessory)
An ashtray insert is available from your Volvo
retailer. This insert slides into either of the cup
holders.
Pen holder
There is a pen holder in the center console, in
front of the gear selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
109
04 Interior
Storage compartments
ATTENTION
Pakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi
AIRBAG
MY KEY
L E CTOR
SE
SOUND
ENTER
Cup holders for the rear seats
Glove compartment
•
Grasp the lower edge of the panel to pull
out the cup holders in the rear side of the
center console.
The glove compartment can be used to store
things such as the owner's manual, maps,
pens, etc.
•
The cup holder insert can be removed to
provide space for a large plastic bottle. Pull
the insert straight up to remove it. Press
down to reinsert it.
Grasp the upper edge of cover and pull to open
this compartment.
Ashtray (accessory)
An ashtray insert is available from your Volvo
retailer.
80
G027025
G027063
G027018
Storage compartment in rear side of the
center console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
110
EXIT
MENU
04
04 Interior
Storage compartments
Coat hanger
The jacket hanger is located on the inboard
side of the front passenger's seat head
restraint. It is only intended for hanging light
garments.
G027040
G027026
G027028
04
Storage space between rear seats
(seven-seat models) – option
Rear side storage compartments and
cup holders (seven-seat models)
This storage space provides compartments for
pens or other small items.
Lift the lid to access the storage compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
111
04 Interior
Securing cargo
Remember that an object weighing 44 lbs
(20 kg) produces a force of 2,200 lbs
(1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph
(50 km/h)!
Keep the following in mind when loading the
vehicle:
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle
is determined by factors such as the number of passengers, the amount of cargo,
the weight of any accessories that may be
installed, etc. See the section "Vehicle
loading" in the chapter "Wheel and tires"
for more detailed information.
•
•
•
Load the cargo against the backrest.
If no one is sitting in the outboard rear
seat(s), reinforce the backrest by fastening
the seat belts.
Nylon cargo net (accessory)
•
Never load cargo above the backrest without a cargo net.
This net can be installed in two places:
G027031
04
As a safety precaution, all cargo in your vehicle
should be securely anchored to keep it from
being thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking, etc. The vehicle is equipped with eyelets in the cargo space to which straps or other
cargo restraints can be attached.
WARNING
The eyelets are not to be used as passenger
restraints or as anchorages for child
restraints.
Consult your Volvo retailer about suitable
accessories for this purpose.
Load heavy cargo as low as possible.
WARNING
When the rear backrest(s) are folded down,
the vehicle should not be loaded to a level
higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper
edge of the rear side windows. Objects
placed higher than this level could impede
the function of the inflatable curtain.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
112
G027058
•
Attachment bracket
The Volvo XC90 can be equipped with a cargo
net made of strong nylon fabric.
•
Behind the rear seat backrests (the second
row of seats in seven-seat models)
•
Behind the front seat backrests if the rear
seat backrests (the second row of seats in
seven-seat models) have been folded
down.
04 Interior
Securing cargo
NOTE
On seven-seat models: When using the net
in the rear attachment brackets, be sure it is
installed in front of the side armrests.
G027059
4. Attach the lower straps to the eyelets on
the floor if the net has been installed in the
rear attachment brackets. Use the eyelets
in the front seat rails if the net has been
installed in the forward attachment brackets.
5. Adjust the straps to pull the net taut.
The cargo net can be stored under the floor of
the cargo area on five-seat models.
WARNING
•
Be sure the cargo net is properly
inserted in the attachment brackets and
the straps are correctly attached to the
eyelets and pulled taut.
•
Do not use the net if it is damaged in any
way.
•
When it is not in use, store the net so
that it cannot be thrown forward in the
event of sudden braking, etc.
04
Attachment eyelet in front seat rail
If the vehicle is equipped with the cargo area
cover, lift the cover out of the vehicle before
installing the cargo net.
1. The upper and lower rods of the cargo net
are hinged. Position the rods so that they
are straight and lock in position.
G027056
3. Insert the other end of the rod in the attachment bracket on the opposite side of the
vehicle.
G027060
2. Insert the end of the upper rod in one of the
attachment brackets (see illustration in the
left column).
Folding and storing the cargo net
Press the release buttons on the hinges (1 in
the illustration) and fold the net.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Upper attachments
``
113
04 Interior
Securing cargo
sion the attachment bracket in the cargo
eyelet.
Steel grid (accessory)
Installing the grid, upper attachments
4. Repeat the operation on the opposite side.
1. Lift in the grid through the tailgate or
through one of the rear passenger doors (in
this case, fold down the rear seat backrests/backrests in second row of seats in
seven-seat models).
6. Place the protective caps on the threads
above the knobs.
2. Insert one of the grid's upper attachments
into an attachment bracket above one of
the rear passenger doors (see illustration
above).
3. Push the grid's attachment into the forward
position in the attachment bracket (see
inset illustration above) to lock the attachment in place.
WARNING
G027057
04
5. Tighten both attachment brackets alternatively.
•
The backrests of the optional third row
seats must be folded down when installing the steel grid.
•
The steel grid is installed behind the
second row of seats in seven-seat models. To avoid the risk of injury, no one
should be allowed to sit in the third row
of seats when the steel grid is in place
in the vehicle.
Lower attachments
4. Insert the grid's other upper attachment in
the attachment bracket above the opposite rear passenger door, and press the
attachment into the forward position in the
attachment bracket to lock it in place.
Installing the grid, lower attachments
1. Insert the lower attachment bracket
through the steel grid's lower mount from
underneath.
2. Install the spring on the attachment
bracket and tighten the knob.
3. Secure the attachment bracket hook in the
lower cargo eyelet. Turn the knob to ten-
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
114
Seven-seat models:
04 Interior
Securing cargo
G027066
G027055
04
Cargo area cover (option)
Grocery bag holder
Installing the cargo area cover:
1. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate.
1. Press the end pieces of the cargo area
cover down in the holders.
2. Fold up the rear section of the cargo compartment floor.
2. Pull out the cargo area cover and hook it in
the holes in the rear cargo area pillars (see
illustration above).
3. Hang or secure your grocery bags by
means of the straps or holders.
Removing the cargo area cover:
1. Press the end pieces of the cover inward.
2. Pull up and lift out.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
115
Keys and remote controls.....................................................................
Locking and unlocking..........................................................................
Child safety locks..................................................................................
Alarm.....................................................................................................
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
116
118
122
124
125
LOCKS AND ALARM
05
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
05 Locks and alarm
Keys and remote controls
Keys
Use the switch on the driver's door armrest to
lock/unlock the vehicle from the inside.
WARNING
If the doors are locked while driving, this
may hinder rapid access to the occupants
of the vehicle in the event of an accident.
(Also see information on "Child safety locks"
G030177
NOTE
05
Your vehicle is equipped with two coded
remote control transmitters with integrated
ignition key blades called Key Integrated
Remote (KIR).
To help prevent accidentally locking the
keys in the vehicle, the central locking system is designed to unlock the doors immediately if the key is left in the ignition switch,
the vehicle is locked using the lock button
on the door and the door is then closed. A
sound from the lock will be audible at this
time.
Please note that this function will not unlock
the doors if the engine is running.
To unlock/lock the vehicle using the key blade:
•
Insert the key blade in the driver's door lock
and turn it once to unlock the driver's door
only.
•
Turn the key blade again (within 10 seconds) to unlock all doors and the tailgate.
•
Turn the key blade once in the opposite
direction to lock all doors and the tailgate.
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)
Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle
contains a coded transmitter. The code in the
key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition
switch where it is compared to the code stored
in the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will
start only with a properly coded key.
Each key has a unique code, which your Volvo
retailer uses if new keys are required. A maxiI
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
118
mum of six remote controls/keys can be programmed and used for one vehicle.
If you misplace a key, take the other keys to an
authorized Volvo retailer for reprogramming as
an antitheft measure.
If two of the keys to your vehicle are close
together, e.g., on the same key ring, when you
try to start the vehicle, this could cause interference in the immobilizer system and result in
the vehicle not starting. If this should occur,
remove one of the keys from the key ring before
trying to start the vehicle again.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following condition: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
05 Locks and alarm
Keys and remote controls
Remote controls
If one of the transmitters is misplaced, a
replacement can be purchased from your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for replacement.
Press this button once to unlock the driver's
door only. Wait for at least 1 second and press
the button again (within 10 seconds) to unlock
all doors, and the tailgate.
Tailgate unlock
Press this button to unlock the tailgate (without
unlocking the other doors). This function will
not open the tailgate.
Panic function
G026963
For more information on this function, see
page 125.
The remote control transmitters will also activate or allow "keyless" entry into the passenger
compartment or the tailgate. These transmitters use a radio frequency that will enable you
to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate from a
distance of 10 – 15 feet (3 – 5 meters). They will
also activate or deactivate your vehicle's alarm
system(s). The vehicle can also be locked/
unlocked with the key.
G027013
Your vehicle is equipped with two coded
remote control transmitters with integrated
ignition keys called Key Integrated Remote
(KIR).
Approach lighting
Unlock
Unlock tailgate
"Panic" function
Approach lighting
Lock
Fold key blade in/out
Press this button when approaching the vehicle at night to light up the interior courtesy light,
parking lights, license plate lights and the lights
in the door mirrors.
05
Lock
Press once to lock all doors, and the tailgate.
Fold key blade in/out
Press to extend the key blade. This button
must also be pressed when the key blade is
folded back into the slot in the side of the
remote control unit.
Using the remote control
Unlock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
119
05 Locks and alarm
Keys and remote controls
NOTE
•
If an airbag deploys, your vehicle's SRS
control module will attempt to automatically unlock all doors.
•
The key blade may also be used to lock
and unlock the doors, and to activate
and deactivate the alarm system.
•
•
05
•
To avoid leaving your keys in the vehicle, make a habit of always locking the
vehicle with the remote control.
If the key blade section of the remote is
not fully folded out when starting the
vehicle, the immobilizer function may
make it impossible to start the engine.
The vehicle can be locked even if a door
is open. When the door(s) are closed,
they will be locked. Please be aware
that the keys could be locked in the car
when this is done.
ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
•
•
Doing so would ACTIVATE:
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
•
the optional interior motion and inclination alarm sensors.
•
•
Doing so would DEACTIVATE:
Canadian 2306104388A
•
the central locking buttons on the front
door armrests, although the interior
door handles would still function to
allow occupants to leave the vehicle.
•
Disabled features would remain disabled until the remote is used again to
unlock the vehicle.
•
In addition, locking an occupied vehicle
would hinder rapid access to the occupants in an accident or emergency.
Canadian 2306104388
Model 504 2927 by Donnelly
Model 509 977 by Connaught Electronics
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Automatic re-locking
If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will
rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened. This helps prevent the
car from inadvertently being left unlocked.
FCC ID: LQNP2T-APU
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following conI
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
120
WARNING
Never use the transmitter to lock the doors
from inside the vehicle.
the break-in alarm, which would sound
if one of the doors were opened
the moonroof and interior courtesy light
controls.
05 Locks and alarm
Keys and remote controls
3. Press the cover back into place. Ensure
that the rubber seal is correctly positioned
to help keep out moisture.
NOTE
G027011
The old battery should be disposed of properly at a recycling center or at your Volvo
retailer.
05
Replacing the battery in the remote
control
If the range of the transmitter is noticeably
reduced, this indicates that the battery is weak
and should be replaced.
To replace the battery:
1. Carefully pry open the rear edge of the
cover with a small screwdriver.
2. Insert a new 3-volt, CR2032 battery, with
the battery's plus side up. Avoid touching
the contact surfaces of the battery with
your fingers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
121
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
This function can be activated/deactivated
from the control panel in the driver's door.
Locking the glove compartment
The glove compartment can be locked with the
master key.
Activating/deactivating automatic
locking
1. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.
05
Locking and unlocking the vehicle from
the inside
3. Depress the central locking button on the
control panel until a new message about
the locking status is displayed.
The message AUTOLOCK ON (the doors will
be locked when the vehicle begins to move) or
AUTOLOCK OFF will be displayed.
The switch on the driver's door armrest can be
used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate, and to set the alarm.
Unlocking the tailgate
The tailgate lock is incorporated in the central
locking system and is locked or unlocked when
all doors are locked/unlocked.
Each door can also be locked with the lock
button on the respective door and opened by
pulling the door handle on the door.
The tailgate can be unlocked by:
Automatic locking
ATTENTION
Pakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi
AIRBAG
ENTER
EXIT
MENU
80
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
122
•
Pressing UNLOCK on the remote control
twice.
•
Using the central locking button on the
driver's door.
MY KEY
L E CTOR
SE
SOUND
G027025
The function locks the doors automatically
when the vehicle's speed exceeds approximately 5 mph (7 km/h). The doors will then
remain locked until a door in opened from the
inside or if all of the doors are unlocked from
the control panel in the driver's door.
G028485
G029646
2. Press the READ button on the left-side
steering wheel lever to erase any messages that may be displayed in the information display.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
•
Pressing the remote control's tailgate
unlock button (see illustration above).
•
Relock the tailgate using the remote's
LOCK button.
Automatic relocking
If you use the tailgate unlock button to unlock
the tailgate without opening it, it will automatically relock after approximately 2 minutes.
NOTE
If you open the tailgate and close it again, it
will remain unlocked and the alarm will not
be rearmed. Press the lock button on the
remote control to relock the tailgate and
rearm the alarm.
05
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
123
05 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
05
Child safety locks in the rear doors
Child safety lock in the tailgate
Power child locks*
Manual child safety locks – rear doors/
tailgate
The controls are located on the rear door jambs
and at the lower edge of the tailgate. Use a key
or small screwdriver to adjust these controls.
WARNING
Remember, in the event of an accident, the
rear seat passengers cannot open the doors
from the inside with the buttons in position
A.
The door/tailgate cannot be opened
from the inside. The door/tailgate can be
opened from the outside.
1. Turn the vehicle's ignition key to at least
position 1.
2. Press the button shown above.
Indicator light in the button OFF: the doors
can be opened from the inside.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To prevent the rear doors from being opened
from the inside:
Indicator light in the button ON: the doors
cannot be opened from the inside. Normal
operation from the outside.
The door/tailgate locks function normally.
124
G027105
G021512
G021513
REAR
AC
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm
The alarm is automatically armed whenever
you lock your vehicle.
When armed, the alarm continuously monitors
a number of points on the vehicle. The following conditions will set off the alarm:
Disarming the alarm
Press the UNLOCK button on the remote control or unlock the doors with the key.
automatically after 25 seconds. When a button
is pressed, there is a 5 second delay before the
panic alarm is deactivated.
Turning off (stopping) the alarm
NOTE
If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by
pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote
control or by unlocking the driver's door with
the key.
LED alarm status signals
The ignition switch is tampered with.
Visual alarm signal
The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the red LED at the top of the dash:
•
•
•
•
•
The hood is forced open.
If there is movement in the passenger compartment (if the vehicle is equipped with
the optional movement sensor).
The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all
turn signals and turning on the interior lighting
for approximately 5 minutes.
•
The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle
is equipped with the optional inclination
sensor).
Audible alarm signal
The tailgate is forced open.
A door is forced open.
•
The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).
•
The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed.
Arming the alarm
Press the LOCK button on the remote control,
lock the vehicle using the key in the driver's
door or press the central lock button on the
driver's door with the door open. One long
flash of the turn signals will confirm that the
alarm is armed.
An audible alarm signal is given by a battery
powered siren. One alarm cycle lasts for
25 seconds.
"Panic" button
In an emergency situation, this feature can be
used to attract attention.
Activate the "panic" button by pressing the red
button on the remote control ( see page 119 for
illustration) for at least 3 seconds or by pressing this button twice within 3 seconds. The turn
signals will flash, and the vehicle's horn will
sound.
This button will NOT unlock the vehicle.
•
•
LED off – the alarm is not armed
•
LED flashes rapidly before the ignition is
switched on – the alarm has been triggered
•
Fault in the alarm system: If a fault has
been detected in the alarm system, a message will be displayed in the text window.
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
LED flashes once per second – the alarm
is armed
05
Automatic re-lock/re-arm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the remote, the
vehicle will re-lock and the alarm will re-arm
after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has
been opened.
The function can be turned off by pressing any
of the buttons on the remote control or will stop
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
125
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
126
128
129
131
133
135
136
137
138
141
142
143
145
147
149
151
155
156
157
158
159
G020912
General information...............................................................................
Fuel requirements.................................................................................
Refueling...............................................................................................
Starting the vehicle...............................................................................
Ignition switch and steering wheel lock................................................
Economical driving................................................................................
Difficult driving conditions.....................................................................
Automatic transmission........................................................................
Jump starting........................................................................................
All Wheel Drive (option).........................................................................
Brake system........................................................................................
Stability system.....................................................................................
Front/rear park assist (accessory/option).............................................
Towing...................................................................................................
Towing a trailer......................................................................................
Detachable trailer hitch.........................................................................
Load carriers (accessory)......................................................................
Cold weather precautions.....................................................................
Before a long distance trip....................................................................
Blind Spot Information System.............................................................
STARTING AND DRIVING
06
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
06 Starting and driving
General information
Engine oil
Unleaded fuel
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers
Although some oil consumption occurs during
normal engine operation, more oil is consumed
when the engine is new as the internal parts
generate higher friction while wearing-in to
each other. From the time the engine is new
until the first maintenance is performed, the oil
consumption could be higher than normal. For
this reason, it is especially important to check
the oil every time you refuel your vehicle during
this period, see page 209.
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter
and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and
Canadian regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps have nozzles which
fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled
"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline
damages the three-way catalytic converter and
the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated
use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the emission control system and
could result in loss of emission warranty coverage. State and local vehicle inspection programs will make detection of misfueling easier,
possibly resulting in emission test failure for
misfueled vehicles.
"Oxygenated fuels"
Fuel requirements
Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
06
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits. Detergent
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit
control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station operator.
NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of
external fuel injector cleaning systems.
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain
an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission
Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please
return your vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for maintenance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
128
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
require that the service pump be marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
there are areas in which the pumps are
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check
with the service station operator. To meet seasonal air quality standards, some areas require
the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed
on page 129 must still be met.
Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to 10%
ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may
also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15%
MTBE may be used.
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
Octane rating
engine's capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation.
Minimum octane
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable.
G028920
Fuel Formulations
Typical pump octane label
Volvo recommends premium for best performance, but using 87 octane or above will not
affect engine reliability.
Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated
horsepower, torque, and fuel economy performance using premium 91 octane fuel.
Demanding driving
In demanding driving conditions, such as operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,
or driving for extended periods at higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to
switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to
change gasoline brands to fully utilize your
Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.
Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead has been
strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
where you must fill your own gas tank, take
precautions. These may include:
•
standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling
•
refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth
of the filler neck during refueling
•
wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Use of Additives
With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your
vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.
Overuse may damage your engine, and some
of these additives contain organically volatile
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself
to these chemicals.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes
inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger
compartment is ventilated, and immediately
return the vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for correction.
06
``
129
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
WARNING
Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with
the tailgate open could lead to poisonous
exhaust gases entering the passenger compartment.
•
If the tailgate must be kept open for any
reason, proceed as follows:
•
•
Close the windows
Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side windows and blower control to its highest
setting.
pressure according to the vehicle load. See
"Tire pressure" section.
Loads should be distributed so that capacity
weight or maximum permissible axle loads are
not exceeded.
Conserving electrical current
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
battery drain:
•
When the engine is not running, avoid turning the ignition key to position II (see
page 135). Many electrical systems (the
audio system, the optional infotainment/
navigation systems, power windows, etc)
will function with the ignition key in position
I. This position reduces drain on the battery.
•
Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc that consume a great deal
of current when the engine is not running
could result in the battery being completely
drained.
Weight distribution affects handling
06
At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a
tendency to understeer, which means that the
steering wheel has to be turned more than
might seem appropriate for the curvature of a
bend.
This ensures good stability and reduces the
risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that these
properties can alter with the vehicle load.
The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less
the tendency to understeer.
Handling, roadholding
NOTE
A warning message will be displayed in the
text window in the instrument panel when
the battery charge is low.
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure
all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check
that the tires are inflated to the recommended
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
130
06 Starting and driving
Refueling
Fuel filler door
You can also keep the vehicle locked if you
remain inside it during refueling. The central
locking button does not lock the fuel filler door.
Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and
is completely closed after refueling.
Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot
weather.
G027073
NOTE
The fuel filler cap can be placed on the hook on
the fuel filler door while refueling
Press the button on the light switch panel (see
the illustration on page 63) when the vehicle is
at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.
Please note that the fuel filler door will remain
unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the
fuel filler door relocks.
If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is
being refueled, this feature enables you to lock
the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler
door unlocked.
needle nears the red zone, or when the fuel
warning light comes on.
WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched on
while refueling your vehicle. If the phone
rings, this may cause a spark that could
ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and
injury.
During a transitional period, a small number
of service stations may still have fuel nozzles that are not compatible with the fuel
filler neck on vehicles equipped with the
evaporative control system.
Refueling
The fuel tank is designed to accommodate
possible expansion of the fuel in hot weather.
See page 265 for fuel tank volume. Be aware
that the "usable" tank capacity will be somewhat less than the specified maximum. When
the fuel level is low, such factors as ambient
temperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure"
characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuel
pump's ability to supply the engine with an
adequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advisable to refuel as soon as possible when the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
06
``
131
06 Starting and driving
Refueling
CAUTION
•
Do not refuel with the engine running1.
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the
ignition is on, an incorrect reading could
occur in the fuel gauge.
•
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap
by turning it clockwise until it clicks into
place1.
•
Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle
more than one extra time. Too much
fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions
can cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling could also cause damage to the
emission control systems.
•
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.
In addition to causing damage to the
environment, gasolines containing
alcohol can cause damage to painted
surfaces, which may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Do not use gasolines containing methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).
This practice can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system.
Such damage may not be covered
06
1
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's
performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
132
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
Starting the engine
WARNING
Before starting, check that the seat, steering
wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly.
Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat if
necessary, see page 100.
NOTE
•
•
After a cold start, idle speed may be
noticeably higher than normal for a
short period. This is done to help bring
components in the emission control
system to their normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which
enables them to control emissions and
help reduce the vehicle's impact on the
environment.
1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Apply the parking brake (hand brake) if not
already set. The gear selector is locked in
the P position (SHIFTLOCK).
3. Without touching the accelerator pedal,
turn the ignition key1 to the starting position. Allow the starter to operate for up to
10 seconds. Release the key as soon as
the engine starts2. If the engine fails to
start, repeat this step.
1
2
NOTE
If the key blade section of the remote is
not fully folded out when starting the
vehicle, the immobilizer function may
make it impossible to start the engine.
•
To release the gear selector from the P
(Park) position, the engine must be running (or the ignition key must be in position II) and the brake pedal must be
depressed.
•
Select the desired gear. The gear
engages after a very slight delay which
is especially noticeable when selecting
R.
Your vehicle is equipped with a KEYLOCK
system. When the engine is switched off,
the gear selector must be in the P position
before the key can be removed from the
ignition switch.
When starting in cold weather, the transmission may shift up at slightly higher
engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission fluid reaches normal
operating temperature.
NOTE
Do not race a cold engine immediately after
starting. Oil flow may not reach some lubrication points fast enough to prevent engine
damage.
WARNING
06
An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause
the accelerator pedal to catch. Check that
the movement of the accelerator pedal is
not impeded. No more than one protective
floor covering may be used at one time.
If two of the keys to your vehicle are close together, e.g. on the same key ring when you try to start the vehicle, this could cause interference in the immobilizer system and result in the vehicle not
starting. If this should occur, remove one of the keys from the key ring before trying to start the vehicle again.
On vehicles equipped with the autostart feature, release the key immediately. See also page 135.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
133
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
WARNING
Always place the gear selector in Park and
apply the parking brake before leaving the
vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended
with the engine running.
•
Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but
very poisonous.
CAUTION
Automatic transmission
•
The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission
engage! Accelerating immediately after
selecting a gear will cause harsh
engagement and premature transmission wear.
•
Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will
help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.
06
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
134
06 Starting and driving
Ignition switch and steering wheel lock
Ignition switch and steering wheel lock
III – Start position:
Release the key when the
engine starts. The key
returns automatically to
the Drive position.
0 – Locked position:
Remove the key to lock
the steering wheelA.
I – Intermediate positionB – "radio position":
Certain accessories,
radio, etc. on, daytime
running lights off.
WARNING
Never switch off the ignition (turn the ignition
key to position 0) or remove the key from the
ignition switch while the vehicle is in motion.
This could cause the steering wheel to lock,
which would make the vehicle impossible to
steer.
A chime will sound if the key is left in the
ignition and the driver's door is opened.
A
B
The gear selector must be in the P (Park) position (automatic
transmission).
Please be aware that leaving the key in this position will
increase battery drain.
Autostart
II – Drive position: The
key position when driving. The vehicle's entire
electrical system is connected.
This function makes it possible to start the
vehicle without holding the key in the start
position (position III) until the engine starts.
Turn the key to position III and release it. The
starter motor will then operate automatically
(for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts.
06
Steering wheel lock
The steering wheel lock might be under tension
when the vehicle is parked.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to free the ignition key.
In order to help reduce vehicle theft, make sure
the steering wheel lock is engaged before leaving the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
135
06 Starting and driving
Economical driving
Economical driving conserves natural
resources
Better driving economy may be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops
and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to
immediate traffic conditions. Observe the following rules:
•
•
06
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature as soon as possible by driving
with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for
the first few minutes of operation. A cold
engine uses more fuel and is subject to
increased wear.
Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle
for driving short distances. This does not
allow the engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
•
Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration
and hard braking.
•
Use the transmission's D (Drive) position
as often as possible and avoid using "kickdown" to help improve fuel economy.
•
•
Do not exceed posted speed limits.
•
Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).
•
Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
ice has ended.
Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.
•
Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
increase air resistance and also fuel consumption.
•
At highway driving speeds, fuel consumption will be lower with the air conditioning
on and the windows closed than with the
air conditioning off and the windows open.
•
Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn
how to drive more economically.
Other factors that decrease gas mileage
are:
•
•
•
•
Dirty air cleaner
Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter
Dragging brakes
Incorrect front end alignment.
Some of the above mentioned items and others
are checked at the standard Maintenance
Service intervals.
CAUTION
Drive slowly and carefully if going through
standing water (i.e. flooded roadways, etc.).
Damage to the engine could result if excess
water is drawn in through the air intake system. Never drive the vehicle in water deeper
than 18 inches (48 cm).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
136
06 Starting and driving
Difficult driving conditions
Driving on rough/unpaved surfaces
The Volvo XC90 is designed primarily for onroad driving, and it has excellent handling characteristics on very rough or unpaved roads.
When driving on poorly maintained or unpaved
roads, please keep the following in mind:
•
Reduce speed on rough surfaces to minimize possible damage to the vehicle's
underbody.
•
When driving on soft surfaces such as dry
sand or snow, try to avoid stopping if at all
possible.
WARNING
Avoid driving diagonally across steep
inclines as this could increase the risk of a
roll-over. Try to drive straight up or down the
slope.
•
If the road is very steep, avoid turning
the vehicle around to help avoid the risk
of rolling over. Back the vehicle up or
down the incline instead.
NOTE
CAUTION
Avoid driving on steep inclines if the fuel
tank is nearly empty. If the flow of fuel to the
engine is interrupted due to the vehicle's
angle of inclination, this could result in damage to the three-way catalytic converter. We
recommend keeping the fuel tank at least
half full when driving on steep inclines.
Driving through water
•
Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.
•
If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than 18 in (48 cm), water may
enter the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating
capacity and may shorten the service
life of these components.
•
Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
water up to the door sills longer than
absolutely necessary. This could result
in electrical malfunctions.
•
If the engine has been stopped while the
car is in water, do not attempt to restart
the engine. Have the car towed out of
the water.
The vehicle can be driven through water up to
a depth of approximately 16 inches (40 cm), at
a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
Take particular care when driving through flowing water.
Clean the electrical connections for trailer wiring after driving in mud or water.
When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.
06
WARNING
After driving through water, press lightly on
the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes
are functioning normally. Water or mud can
make the brake linings slippery, resulting in
delayed braking effect.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
137
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
N (Neutral)
Neutral – no gear engaged. Use the parking
brake.
Automatic transmission – shift gate
positions
WARNING
Never leave the vehicle unattended when
the engine is running. If, by mistake, the gear
selector is moved from P, the vehicle may
start moving.
G026990
R (Reverse)
Never engage R while the vehicle is moving.
P (Park)
Use this position when starting the engine or
parking the vehicle.
06
D is the normal driving position and should be
used as often as possible to help improve fuel
economy. The vehicle should not be moving
when shifting from R to the D position.
Never use P while the vehicle is in motion.
The parking brake should also be set whenever
the vehicle is parked.
NOTE
The transmission has 6 forward speeds.
The gear selector is mechanically locked in
the P position (SHIFTLOCK). To release the
gear selector from this position, the engine
must be running (or the ignition key must be in
position II) and the brake pedal must be
depressed.
Shift gate positions
Depress the button on the front of the gear
selector knob to move between the R, N, D,
and P positions.
Kickdown
Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) is
achieved by depressing the accelerator pedal
fully and briskly. An upshift will occur when
approaching the top speed for a particular gear
or by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly.
Kickdown can be used for maximum acceleration or when passing at highway speeds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
138
G020237
D (Drive)
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
The gear selector must be in the D (Drive)
position for kickdown to function.
Manual shifting – Geartronic
You can move the gear selector freely between
the MAN (Manual) and D (Drive) positions to
select forward gears while driving. Gears 3, 4,
5, and 6 have a "lock-up" function which
reduces engine speed and helps save fuel.
While driving
If you select the MAN position while driving, the
gear that was being used in the D position will
also initially be selected in MAN position.
•
Move the gear selector forward (toward
"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward
(toward "– ") to shift to a lower gear.
•
If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the
transmission will downshift one gear and
will utilize the braking power of the engine.
If the current speed is too high for using a
lower gear, the downshift will not occur
until the speed has decreased enough to
allow the lower gear to be used.
•
If you slow down to a very low speed, the
transmission will automatically shift down.
•
When starting in the MAN position, 3rd
gear is the highest gear that may be
selected.
NOTE
Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot be
selected in Geartronic mode.
•
A "lock-up" feature1 reduces engine speed
and help saves fuel.
The currently selected gear will be displayed in
the instrument panel (see page 54).
•
To access the MAN shifting position from
D, move the gear selector to the left to
MAN.
•
To return to the D positions from MAN,
move the gear selector to the right.
1
W – Winter/Wet driving mode –
enhanced vehicle traction
G030859
NOTE
Press the W button at the base of the gear
selector to engage/disengage this driving
mode (see illustration). The W symbol will
appear in the display (see page 54) when the
function is activated.
06
This mode may be selected for starting/moving
off on slippery roads. The vehicle starts off in
3rd gear to help maintain traction. First and
second gears will only be used during kickdown.
Six-speed transmission: gears 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
139
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
NOTE
Mode W can be chosen regardless of the
postion of the gear selector but will only
function when the gear selector is in the D
(drive) position.
06
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
140
06 Starting and driving
Jump starting
G030860
2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive
(+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal in
your vehicle's engine compartment (2),
located under a small black plastic cover
attached to the fuse box cover, marked
with a "+" sign. Remove the cover on the
main fuse box if necessary to access this
terminal. Then connect the auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) to the ground
point in your vehicle's engine compartment
(4).
3. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,
then start the engine in the vehicle with
dead battery.
Follow these instructions to jump start your
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another
vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle.
Although your vehicle's battery is located
under the floor of the cargo area, jumper cables
should be connected in the engine compartment, to the points shown in the illustrations.
4. After the engine has started, first remove
the negative (–) terminal jumper cable.
Then remove the positive (+) terminal
jumper cable.
If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in
another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not
touching to prevent premature completion of a
circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
WARNING
•
Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
•
Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to personal
injury.
Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
06
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
To jump start your vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
141
06 Starting and driving
All Wheel Drive (option)
All Wheel Drive (AWD) – general
information
Your Volvo can be equipped with an electronically controlled All Wheel Drive system
(option), which means that power is distributed
automatically between the front and rear
wheels. Under normal driving conditions, most
of the engine's power is directed to the front
wheels. However, if there is any tendency for
the front wheels to spin, an electronically controlled coupling distributes power to the
wheels that have the best traction.
Temporary Spare
The temporary spare tire is for temporary, lowspeed, short-distance use only. Replace it with
a full-sized tire as soon as possible. Do not
drive on the temporary spare at speeds above
50 m.p.h. (80 km/h).
NOTE
Never install snow chains on a temporary
spare.
Tire dimensions
06
Volvo recommends that you always drive on
tires of the same brand, size, construction
(radial), tread pattern, load-, speed-, traction-,
temperature-, and treadwear rating. Never
drive on mixed tires, except for brief periods
when the temporary spare tire is in use.
Always use properly inflated tires of correct
dimensions. Tire size and inflation pressures
are shown on the tire inflation pressure placards, located on the driver's side B-pillar (the
structural member at the side of the vehicle, at
the rear of the driver's door opening), or on the
inside of the fuel filler door on Canadian models.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
142
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
BRAKE Brake circuit malfunction
The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two master cylinders and two separate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in
one of these circuits, it is still possible to stop
the vehicle with the other brake circuit.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure,
the stopping distance will be longer.
A warning light in the instrument panel will light
up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.
If this light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir.
NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain
pressure on the pedal – do not pump the
brakes.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a Brake failure – Service
urgent message is displayed in the text
window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system
inspected.
NOTE
When the vehicle is at a standstill and the
engine is idling, e.g. at a traffic light and the
brake pedal is depressed, the pedal may go
down slightly. This is a normal function of
the power-assisted brake system.
Power brakes function only when the
engine is running
The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure
which is only created when the engine is running. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the
engine switched off.
If the power brakes are not working, the brake
pedal must be pressed approximately four
times harder than usual to make up for the lack
of power assistance. This can happen for
example when towing your vehicle or if the
engine is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The brake pedal feels harder than usual.
Water on brake discs and brake pads
affects braking
Driving in rain and slush or passing through an
automatic car wash can cause water to collect
on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a
delay in braking effect when the pedal is
depressed. To avoid such a delay when the
brakes are needed, depress the pedal occasionally when driving through rain, slush etc.
This will remove the water from the brakes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Check that brake application feels normal. This
should also be done after washing or starting
in very damp or cold weather.
Severe strain on the brake system
The brakes will be subject to severe strain
when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or
when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
slower, which means that the cooling of the
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,
shift into a lower gear and let the engine help
with the braking. Do not forget that, if you are
towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to
a greater than normal load.
Anti-lock brakes (ABS)
If the warning lamp lights up there
is a malfunction of the ABS system
(the standard braking system will
however function) and the vehicle
should be driven cautiously to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
for inspection. The Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) helps to improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) during severe braking conditions by limiting brake lockup. When the
system "senses" impending lockup, braking
pressure is automatically modulated in order to
help prevent lockup, which could lead to a skid.
06
The system performs a self-diagnostic test
when the engine is started and when the
``
143
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal will
pulsate several times and a sound may be
audible from the ABS control module. This is
normal.
•
If both warning lights go off, no further
action is required.
•
If both lights are still on after the engine has
been restarted, switch off the engine again
and check the brake fluid level (see
page 212 for the location of the brake fluid
reservoir).
To obtain optimal effect from the ABS system,
constant pressure should be kept on the brake
pedal. Do not pump the brake pedal.
06
EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system.
EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to the
rear brakes to help provide optimal braking
capacity. The brake pedal will pulsate during
braking, which is normal.
If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come on
at the same time, this could indicate a fault in
the brake system.
1. Stop the vehicle in a suitable place and
switch off the engine.
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a Brake failure – Service
urgent message is displayed in the text
window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system
inspected.
•
If the brake fluid level is above the MIN
mark, drive carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the
brake system inspected.
Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)
The EBA function is designed to provide full
brake effect immediately in the event of sudden, hard braking. The system is activated by
the speed with which you depress the brake
pedal.
2. Restart the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
144
•
When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure
in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. You must
maintain full pressure on the brake
pedal in order to utilize the system completely. There will be no braking effect if
the pedal is released. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal
is released.
•
When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink
more than usual when the engine is
started. This is normal and the pedal will
return to its usual position when it is
released.
WARNING
The switching of the ABS modulator will be
audible and the brake pedal will pulsate during
braking. Please be aware that ABS does not
increase the absolute braking potential of the
vehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABS
will not shorten stopping distances on slippery
surfaces.
ABS with EBD (Electronic Brake Force
Distribution)
NOTE
06 Starting and driving
Stability system
Dynamic Stability Traction Control
(DSTC)
NOTE
•
The stability system consists of a number of
functions designed help reduce wheel spin,
counteract skidding, and to generally help
improve directional stability.
•
NOTE
Traction control (TC)
This function is designed to help reduce wheel
spin by transferring power from a drive wheel
that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the
opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).
TC is most active at low speeds.
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and
cannot be switched off.
G028511
A pulsating sound will be audible when the
system is actively operating and is normal.
Controls on the left-side steering wheel lever
Temporarily switching off Spin control
1. Turn the thumbwheel (1) on the left-side
steering wheel lever until the DSTC
menu is displayed.
2. Hold down the RESET button (2) to toggle
between DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON or
OFF.
•
The message DSTC SPIN CONTROL
OFF indicates that the stability system's spin control function has temporarily been switched off.
The stability control indicator light will
illuminate and remain on until spin control has been reactivated.
The spin control function is automatically enabled each time the engine is
started.
• DSTC ON indicates that all system
functions are active.
Active Yaw Control (AYC)
This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking
one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows
a tendency to skid or slide laterally.
06
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and
cannot be switched off.
Spin control (SC)
The spin control function is designed to help
prevent the drive wheels from spinning while
the vehicle is accelerating.
WARNING
The car's handling and stability characteristics will be altered if the DSTC system functions have been disabled.
Under certain circumstances, such as when
driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to
temporarily switch off this function for maximum tractive force.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
145
06 Starting and driving
Stability system
DSTC-related messages in the text
window
• TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF – The system has been temporarily
switched off due to high brake temperature
and will automatically switch on again
when the brakes have cooled.
•
"ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – the
system has been automatically disengaged due to a fault. A trained and qualified
Volvo service technician should check the
system.
Symbols in the instrument panel
The Stability Control indicator light
This light indicates different conditions, depending on how it illuminates.
06
The Stability Control indicator light
illuminates for approximately 2 seconds
This indicates that the system is performing a
self-diagnostic test when the ignition is
switched on.
The Stability Control indicator light
glows steadily
ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed in the text window at the same time.
A fault is indicated in the stability system.
•
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and switch
off the engine.
•
•
Restart the engine.
•
If the indicator light remains on, drive to an
authorized Volvo workshop as soon as
possible to have the system checked.
If the indicator light goes out, the fault was
temporary and no further action is
required.
The Stability Control indicator light
glows steadily
If DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF is displayed in
the text window at the same time, this is a
reminder that spin control has been disabled
by the driver.
The warning symbol
The warning symbol glows
steadily yellow
The Stability Control indicator light
flashes
This indicates that the stability system is
actively functioning to help counteract wheel
spin and/or a skid.
The system has been temporarily switched off
due to high brake temperature. "TRACTION
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
146
CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF" will be displayed. The system will automatically switch
on again when the brakes have cooled.
WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but
can never replace, the driver's judgement
and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always
be adapted to traffic and road conditions.
06 Starting and driving
Front/rear park assist (accessory/option)
WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT a
safety system. This system is designed to
be a supplementary aid when parking the
vehicle. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judgement.
G020294
Function
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button in the center console illuminates.
•
Front/rear park assist
The front park assist system is active from
the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately
10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the
vehicle is backing up.
The park assist system is designed to assist
you when driving into parking spaces, garages,
etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located
in one or both bumpers to measure the distance to a vehicle, object, or a person who may
be close to the front or rear of your vehicle.
•
Park assist is available in two versions:
Rear park assist
•
•
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comes
from the rear speakers.
Rear bumper only
Front and rear bumpers
Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.
The system must be deactivated when towing
a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
assist system's sensors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
NOTE
Rear park assist is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine
trailer wiring is used.
Front park assist
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle
is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the audio system's front
speakers.
•
It may not be possible to combine auxiliary
headlights and front park assist since
these lights could trigger the system's sensors.
Activating/deactivating park assist
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started.
•
Press the Park assist button on the center
console (see page 60) to temporarily deactivate the system(s). The indicator light in
the button will go out when the system has
been deactivated.
•
Park assist will be automatically reactivated the next time the engine is started, or if
the button is pressed (the indicator light in
the button will illuminate).
06
``
147
06 Starting and driving
Front/rear park assist (accessory/option)
•
Front park assist is disengaged automatically when the parking brake is
applied.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with front and
rear park assist, both systems will be
deactivated by pressing the button.
Audible signals from the park assist
system
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to an
object, and becomes constant when you are
within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object
in front of or behind the vehicle. If the volume
of another source from the audio system is
high, this will be automatically lowered.
06
If there are objects within this distance both
behind and in front of the vehicle, the signal
alternates between front and rear speakers.
Faults in the system
Cleaning the sensors
If the yellow warning symbol illuminates and PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED is shown
on the information display, this
indicates that the system is not
functioning properly and has been disengaged.
Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include
such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
not indicate a fault in the system.
G026946
NOTE
Park assist sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and a suitable car washing detergent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause
incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
148
06 Starting and driving
G027042
Towing
Positions for attaching towing eyelets
Emergency towing
The towing eyelet is located in the tool bag,
under the floor of the cargo area. This eyelet
must be screwed into the positions provided
on the right sides of either the front or rear
bumper (see illustrations).
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet
should be removed and returned to the tool
bag. Press the cover back into position.
2. Screw the towing eyelet (C) in place (B),
first by hand and then using the tire iron
until it is securely in place.
Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not
exceed the maximum allowable towing
speed.
•
Maximum distance with front wheels on
ground: 50 miles (80 km).
•
While the vehicle is being towed, try to
keep the tow rope taut at all times.
•
The vehicle should only be towed in the
forward direction.
WARNING
Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the
vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.
To attach the towing eyelet:
1. Use a coin to pry open the lower edge of
the cover (A)
•
Precautions when the vehicle is in tow
•
The steering wheel must be unlocked. Turn
the ignition key to position I or II.
•
The gear selector must be in position N.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
06
``
149
06 Starting and driving
Towing
CAUTION
Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with the
front wheels off the ground should not be
towed at speeds about 50 mph (70 km/h) or
for distances longer than 30 miles (50 km).
WARNING
•
CAUTION
•
•
06
If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not
attempt to start the vehicle by pushing
or pulling it as this will damage the
three-way catalytic converter(s). The
engine must be jump started using an
auxiliary battery (see page 141).
•
•
The towing eyelets must not be used for
pulling another vehicle out of a ditch or
for any similar purpose involving severe
strain.
Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the
vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be
used to secure the vehicle on the flat
bed. Consult the tow truck operator.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
150
Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment.
If wheel lift equipment must be used, please
use extreme caution to help avoid damage to
the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should
be towed with the rear wheels on the ground
if at all possible.
If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground, please
refer to the towing information on the previous
page.
CAUTION
G030862
•
Please check with state and local
authorities before attempting this type
of towing, as vehicles being towed are
subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of
towing device, lighting, etc.
Remember that the power brakes and
power steering will not function when
engine is not running. The braking and
steering systems will function but the
brake pedal pressure required is
3 – 4 times above normal and greater
steering effort must be exerted.
Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/
All Wheel Drive
•
Sling-type equipment applied at the
front will damage radiator and air conditioning lines.
•
It is equally important not to use slingtype equipment at the rear or apply lifting equipment inside the rear wheels;
serious damage to the rear axle may
result.
•
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be
used to secure the vehicle on the flat
bed. Consult the tow truck operator.
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
The maximum weights recommended by Volvo
for trailers with brakes are shown in the table
below.
NO. OF
OCCUPANTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SEATING
POSITION
FRONT SEAT
FRONT SEAT
2ND ROW OF
SEATS
2ND ROW OF
SEATS
2ND ROW OF
SEATS
OPTIONAL 3RD
ROW OF
SEATS
OPTIONAL 3RD
ROW OF
SEATS
All Wheel Drive
5,000 LBS
5,000 LBS
4,500 LBS
3,700 LBS
2,900 LBS
1,800 LBS
(2250 KG)
(2250 KG)
(2050 KG)
(1700 KG)
(1350 KG)
(800 KG)
TRAILER TOWING NOT RECOMMENDED
MAX. TRAILER
HITCH
TONGUE LOAD
500 LBS
500 LBS
450 LBS
370 LBS
290 LBS
180 LBS
(225 KG)
(225 KG)
(205 KG)
(170 KG)
(135 KG)
(80 KG)
Front Wheel
Drive
4,000 LBS
4,000 LBS
4,000 LBS
4,000 LBS
3,700 LBS
2,500 LBS
1,400 LBS
(1800 KG)
(1800 KG)
(1800 KG)
(1800 KG)
(1650 KG)
(1150 KG)
(650 KG)
MAX. TRAILER
HITCH
TONGUE LOAD
400 LBS
400 LBS
400 LBS
400 LBS
370 LBS
250 LBS
140 LBS
(180 KG)
(180 KG)
(180 KG)
(180 KG)
(165 KG)
(115 KG)
(65 KG)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
–
06
``
151
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
NOTE
•
•
Recommended hitch tongue load:
not more than 10% of the trailer's
weight. The trailer load should be positioned so that it does not shift and the
tongue load should be 10% of the trailer's weight. However, the tongue load
should not exceed the maximum permissible weights indicated in the table
above.
When towing trailers without brakes,
the maximum permissible trailer weight
is 1,700 lbs (750 kg).
•
If necessary, redistribute the weight of
any cargo in the trailer to avoid excessive weight on the trailer hitch.
•
The maximum trailer weight listed in the
table for All Wheel Drive models,
5,000 lbs (2250 kg) is only applicable
when there are not more than two occupants in the vehicle, in the front seats,
with a combined weight of 300 lbs
(135 kg), with no other cargo in the vehicle.
06
•
600 lbs (270 kg), with no other cargo in
the vehicle.
The maximum weight listed for Front
Wheel Drive models, 4,000 lbs (1800 kg)
is only applicable when there are not
more than four occupants in the vehicle,
in the front seats and second row of
seats, with a combined weight of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
152
NOTE
•
Vehicles used for towing a trailer on a
regular basis, or for long-distance highway towing should be equipped with an
automatic transmission oil cooler and
Volvo's automatic self-leveling system
for the rear suspension. Consult your
Volvo retailer.
•
Volvo recommends the use of Volvo
trailer hitches that are specially
designed for the vehicle.
•
All Volvo models are equipped with
energy-absorbing shock-mounted
bumpers. Trailer hitch installation
should not interfere with the proper
operation of this bumper system.
•
Increase tire pressure to recommended
full inflation pressure. See chapter
"Wheels and tires."
•
When your vehicle is new, avoid towing
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles
(1,000 km).
•
Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine
coolant temperature should be closely
watched when driving in hot climates or
hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn
off the air conditioner if the temperature
gauge needle enters the red range.
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
NOTE
•
If the automatic transmission begins to
overheat, a message will be displayed
in the text window.
•
Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability, and economy.
•
It is necessary to balance trailer brakes
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe stop (check and observe
state/local regulations).
•
Do not connect the trailer's brake system directly to the vehicle's brake system.
•
Remove the ball and drawbar assembly
when the hitch is not being used.
•
Volvo recommends the use of synthetic
engine oil when towing a trailer over
long distances or in mountainous areas.
NOTE
•
•
WARNING
When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake before
putting the gear selector in P. When
starting on a hill, put the gear selector in
D before releasing the parking brake.
Always follow the trailer manufacturer's
recommendations for wheel chocking.
If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make
sure the gear you select does not put
too much strain on the engine (using too
high a gear).
•
Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
not be used on Volvos, nor should
safety chains be attached to the
bumper.
•
Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.
•
Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle
brake system, nor a trailer's lighting
system directly to the vehicle lighting
system. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for correct
installation.
•
When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
wire must be correctly fastened to the
hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch
on the vehicle. The safety wire should
never be fastened to or wound around
the drawbar ball.
06
Smoother starts with a trailer
Models equipped with the V8-engine and the
6-speed automatic transmission have a builtin function that reduces acceleration slightly in
first gear when the vehicle is towing a trailer.
This is done to help avoid wheel spin and to
make starting off smoother.
•
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
This function is activated when the trailer's
electrical connector is plugged into the
``
153
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
electrical socket mounted near the trailer
hitch.
•
The function is automatically deactivated
when the trailer's wiring is disconnected
from the socket. The vehicle will then
accelerate normally.
NOTE
Since this function is activated when a connector is plugged into the electrical socket
near the trailer hitch, it will be activated by
any electrical equipment (e.g. bicycle racks
with lighting, etc) that is plugged in, and will
remain active until the equipment is unplugged from the socket.
Leveling
06
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic leveling, the rear suspension always retains the
correct ride height regardless of the load.
•
The system adjusts the rear suspension to
the correct level after the vehicle has been
driven a short distance.
•
When the vehicle is stationary, the rear
suspension lowers, which is normal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
154
06 Starting and driving
Detachable trailer hitch
Overview
4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end
of the locking bolt.
Removing the ball holder
1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt
and slide the locking bolt out of the ball
holder/hitch assembly.
D
E
A
B
G010496
C
Ball holder
2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.
A cover for the hitch assembly can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
Locking bolt
Cotter pin
Hitch assembly
06
Safety wire attachment
Installing the ball holder
1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt
out of the hitch assembly.
2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one
in the hitch assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
155
06 Starting and driving
Load carriers (accessory)
Positioning load carriers
If wing-shaped load carriers are used, make
sure that they are installed on the roof rails with
the rounded edge forward. Load carriers of this
type are identical and can be placed anywhere
along the roof rails.
When not in use, we recommend that the front
load carrier be placed approximately 2 inches
(5 cm) in front of the center roof rail anchorage
point and the rear load carrier approximately
1.5 inches (3.5 cm) in front of the rear rail
anchorage. This will help to reduce wind noise.
Installing load carriers
Make sure that the load carriers are pressed
firmly out against the roof rail and securely
tightened place. Check regularly that any load
carriers are securely in place.
06
WARNING
Loads carried on the vehicle's roof should
not exceed 220 lbs (100 kg), including the
weight of the load carriers and any other
load carrying equipment (ski boxes, bicycle
racks, etc.). Excessive loads on the roof can
adversely affect the handling and roadholding characteristics of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
156
06 Starting and driving
Cold weather precautions
If you wish to check your vehicle before the
approach of cold weather, the following advice
is worth noting:
•
•
The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not
approved by Volvo. Different types of
antifreeze must not be mixed.
•
Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvo
engine coolant to protect your vehicle during cold weather.
•
•
1
•
Make sure that the engine coolant contains
50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture
will reduce freeze protection. This gives
protection against freezing down to –31 °F
(–35 °C). See section "Coolant".
•
•
Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
prevents the formation of condensation in
the tank. In addition, in extremely cold
weather conditions it is worthwhile to add
fuel line de-icer before refueling.
The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
cold-weather starting as well as decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is
warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, particularly the synthetic type1, is recommended. Be sure to use good quality oil but
do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving
or in warm weather. See section "Engine
oil" for more information.
•
Down to 0 ° F (–18 ° C):1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water
The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc. are used more often.
Moreover, the capacity of the battery
decreases as the temperature drops. In
very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check the state of charge
more frequently and spray an antirust oil on
the battery posts.
•
Down to –18 ° F (–28 ° C): 1 part washer
solvent and 1 part water
•
Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving – see
section "Wheels and tires."
To prevent the washer fluid reservoir
from freezing, add washer solvents containing antifreeze (see page 211 for the
location of the washer fluid reservoir). This
is important since dirt is often splashed on
the windshield during winter driving,
requiring the frequent use of the washers
and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent should
be diluted as follows:
•
Down to 14 ° F (–10 ° C): 1 part washer
solvent and 4 parts water
•
Down to 5 ° F (–15 ° C): 1 part washer solvent and 3 parts water
NOTE
Avoid the use of de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.
W – Winter/Wet driving mode – enhanced
vehicle traction
•
Mode W will only function if the gear selector is in the (D)rive position.
•
Press the button at the base of the gear
selector to engage/disengage this driving
mode.
•
An LED in the button will light up to indicate
that W is engaged and this will also be displayed in the instrument panel (see
page 54).
•
This mode may be selected for starting/
moving off on slippery roads.
06
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance service intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
157
06 Starting and driving
Before a long distance trip
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before driving long distances.
Your retailer or service technician will also be
able to supply you with bulbs, fuses, spark
plugs and wiper blades for your use in the event
that problems occur.
•
Have a word with your Volvo retailer if you
intend to drive in countries where it may be
difficult to obtain the correct fuel.
•
Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice
are likely to occur, consider snow tires.
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:
•
Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption is normal.
•
•
•
•
•
Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.
•
The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
•
•
Check all lights, including high beams.
06
1
Check transmission oil level1.
Check condition of drive belts.
Check state of the battery's charge.
Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are worn.
Check tire pressures.
Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle’s transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle’s transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
158
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System
your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.
(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see
the illustration, the indicator light in the door
panel (2) illuminates. The light will glow continuously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the
blind area.
B
A
•
BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.
•
BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to turn
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes.
BLIS camera
Indicator light
•
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes in a safe manner.
BLIS symbol
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an
information system that indicates the presence
of another vehicle moving in the same direction
as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind
area."
The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras (1) are located beneath
the side-view mirrors.
NOTE
The door panel indicator light illuminates on
the side of the vehicle where the system has
detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is
passed on both sides at the same time, both
lights will illuminate.
When one (or both) of the cameras have
detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of
G020296
G020295
WARNING
Areas monitored by BLIS
Distance A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)
Distance B = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters)
BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
driver if a fault should occur with the system.
For example, if one or both of the system's
cameras are obscured, a message ( see the
table on page 161) will appear in the information display in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,
the system can be temporarily switched off (for
instructions, see page 161).
06
When does BLIS function
The system functions when your vehicle is
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
159
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System
When you pass another vehicle:
The system reacts when you pass another
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)
faster than that vehicle.
vehicle in the blind area must have its headlights on. This means, for example, that the
system will not detect a trailer without headlights that is being towed behind a car or truck.
WARNING
•
BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.
•
BLIS does not react to vehicles that are
standing still.
•
The function of the BLIS cameras may
be affected by intense light, or when
driving at night in areas where there are
no external sources of light (e.g., street
lights, other vehicles, etc.). In such
cases, the system may react as if the
cameras were obscured.
•
In both of the above mentioned conditions, a message will appear in the information display.
•
When driving in such conditions, the
system can be temporarily switched off.
For instructions, see page 161.
•
When the message is no longer displayed, BLIS will return to normal function.
•
The BLIS cameras have the same limitation as the human eye. In other words,
their "vision is impaired" by adverse
weather conditions such as heavy
snowfall, dense fog, etc.
When you are passed by another vehicle:
The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by
another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph
(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.
WARNING
06
•
•
BLIS does not function in sharp curves.
•
If you are towing a wide trailer, this may
prevent the BLIS cameras from detecting other vehicles in adjacent lanes.
BLIS does not function when your vehicle is backing up.
How BLIS functions in daylight and
darkness
Daylight
BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect
motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
motorcycles, etc.
Darkness
BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding
vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
160
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System
Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses
G018176
In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera
lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped
clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.
CAUTION
Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.
•
The lenses are electrically heated to
help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gently brush away snow from the lenses.
Light reflected from a wet road surface
G026955
•
In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)
may illuminate even when there are no other
vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
NOTE
G018177
Limitations
The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on
a highway
If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occasionally even when there are no other vehicles in the blind area, this does not indicate
a fault in the system.
The following are several examples of situations in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may
illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
G018178
In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.
service required will be displayed.
Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low
on the horizon
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Switching BLIS on and off
BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will
provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.
•
The system can be switched off by pressing the BLIS button in the center console
(see the illustration). The indicator light in
the button goes out when the system is
switched off, and a text message is displayed.
•
BLIS can be switched on again by pressing
the button. The indicator light in the button
will illuminate and a new text message will
be displayed. Press the READ button (see
page 58) to erase the message.
06
``
161
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System
System status
Text in the display
BLIS NOT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY
BLIND-SPOT
SYST SERVICE
REQUIRED
RIGHT CAMERA
OBSCURED
BLIND-SPOT
SYST R CAMERA
BLOCKED
LEFT CAMERA
OBSCURED
BLIND-SPOT
SYST L CAMERA
BLOCKED
BOTH CAMERAS
OBSCURED
BLIND-SPOT
SYST CAMERAS
BLOCKED
BLIS SYSTEM OFF
BLIND-SPOT INFO
SYSTEM OFF
BLIS SYSTEM ON
BLIND-SPOT INFO
SYSTEM ON
BLIS FUNCTION
REDUCED
BLIND-SPOT
SYST FUNCTION
REDUCED
06
if the system has not been turned off by pressing the BLIS button).
The messages listed above can only be displayed if the ignition key is in position II (or if
the engine is running) and if BLIS is active (i.e.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
162
06 Starting and driving
06
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
163
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
164
166
168
170
171
172
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
185
190
G020918
General information...............................................................................
Tire inflation ..........................................................................................
Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. models.........................................
Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadian models.................................
Tire designations...................................................................................
Glossary of tire terminology..................................................................
Vehicle loading......................................................................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................................................................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires................................................
Temporary spare...................................................................................
Tire rotation...........................................................................................
Changing wheels...................................................................................
Tire Sealing System .............................................................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – U.S. models only..............
WHEELS AND TIRES
07
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
07 Wheels and tires
General information
CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry
pavement performance with consideration
for hydroplaning resistance. As such, they
may be more susceptible to road hazard
damage and, depending on driving conditions, may achieve a tread life of less than
20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWD
or DSTC system, these tires are not
designed for winter driving, and should be
replaced with winter tires when weather
conditions dictate.
07
The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces.
optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered
roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on
all four wheels.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires
are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all
four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering
the vehicle's roadholding and handling characteristics.
Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
on rims), they should be suspended off the
floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not
be suspended.
CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored
in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,
etc.
Tread wear indicator
The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI
are printed on the side of the tire. When
approximately 1/16 " (1.6 mm) is left on the
tread, these strips become visible and indicate
that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less
than 1/16 " (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor traction.
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size
as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the
same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.
Certain models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree
of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires
without the "all-season" rating. However, for
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
166
Tread wear indicator
G020323
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening), or on the inside of the fuel filler door
on Canadian models.
07 Wheels and tires
General information
WARNING
•
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. Approved tire sizes
are shown in the Tire inflation pressure
tables on pages 170 and 171.
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent
high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V)
exposure can accelerate the aging process.
When replacing tires, the tires with the most
tread should be mounted on the rear wheels to
reduce the chance of oversteer during hard
braking.
Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the tires
and/or wheels permanently.
You should replace the spare tire when you
replace the other road tires due to the aging of
the spare.
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration
above).
A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration
should be replaced immediately.
Improving tire economy:
New tires
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of 2000, the
manufacturing week and year
will be indicated with 4 digits
(e.g. 1502 means that the tire
illustrated was manufactured
during week 15 of 2002).
•
Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire
pressure table see page 170.
•
Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard
braking and tire screeching.
•
•
Tire wear increases with speed.
•
Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.
•
Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
07
Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
167
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
•
Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Tire inflation placards on U.S. models
G032520
G032513
WARNING
Tire inflation placard on Canadian models
Check tire inflation pressure regularly.
07
Tables listing the recommended inflation pressure for your vehicle can be found on pages
170 and 171. A tire inflation pressure placard
is also located on the driver's side B-pillar (the
structural member at the side of the vehicle, at
the rear of the driver's door opening). This placard indicates the designation of the factorymounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load
limits and inflation pressure.
NOTE
The placards shown indicate inflation pressure for the tires installed on the vehicle at
the factory only.
•
•
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
pressure, including the spare, at least once
a month and before long trips. You are
strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and
wear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
168
•
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury.
•
Under-inflated tires reduce the load carrying capacity of your vehicle.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire
inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree
temperature drop causes a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check
your tire pressures frequently and adjust them
to the proper pressure, which can be found on
the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label.
Checking tire pressure
A certain amount of air seepage from the tires
occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates
with seasonal changes in temperature. Always
check tire pressure regularly.
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the
tires are cold.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.
that could puncture the tire and cause an
air leak.
•
Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregularities.
This temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If
you have to drive farther than this distance to
pump your tire(s), check and record the tire
pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold
pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
NOTE
•
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center
of the valve. Then recheck the pressure
with your tire gauge.
•
Some spare tires require higher inflation
pressure than the other tires. Consult
the tire inflation tables on pages 170
and 171 or see the inflation pressure
placard.
To check inflation pressure:
•
Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the
valve.
•
Add air to reach the recommended air
pressure.
•
•
Replace the valve cap.
•
Visually inspect the tires to make sure there
are no nails or other objects embedded
07
Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
169
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure tables – U.S. models
The following tire pressures are recommended
by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Speed ratings
The speed ratings on the tire's sidewall translate as follows, for example:
M = 81 mph (130 km/h)
Cold tire pressures up to five persons
H = 130 mph (210 km/h)
Tire size
Y = 186 mph (300 km/h)
XC90
Front, psi
(kPa)
Rear, psi
(kPa)
36 (250)
36 (250)
61 (420)
61 (420)
V = 149 mph (240 km/h)
See also page 172 for an explanation of the
designations on the sidewall of the tire.
225/70R16
235/65R17
235/60R18
255/50R19
255/45R20
Temporary
spare tire
T155/85R18
07
Load ratings
The load ratings on the tire's sidewall translate
as follows, for example:
102 = 1874 lbs (850 kg)
104 = 1984 lbs (900 kg)
107 = 2150 lbs (975 kg)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
170
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure tables – Canadian models
The following tire pressures are recommended
by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-
tion placard for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Cold tire pressures up to five persons
Tire size
225/70R16
Cold tire pressures up to five persons psi (kPa)
Optional pressure up to three persons psi (kPa)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
39 (270)
39 (270)
32 (220)
32 (220)
39 (270)
39 (270)
35 (240)
35 (240)
61 (420)
61 (420)
61 (420)
61 (420)
235/65R17
235/60R18
255/50R19
255/45R20
Temporary spare tire
T155/85R18
07
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
171
07 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
7
95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of
1521 lbs (690 kg).
9
6
8
5
10
4
11
3
12
H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and
with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
1
G026442
2
NOTE
This information may not appear on the tire
because it is not required by law.
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall
of all tires (see the illustration).
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.
65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width.
R: Radial tire.
15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
172
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN):
This begins with the letters "DOT" and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are
the plant code where it was manufactured,
the next two are the tire size code and the
last four numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four digits.
For example, 2501 means the 25th week of
2001. The numbers in between are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's
discretion. This information helps a tire
manufacturer identify a tire for safety recall
purposes.
Tire Ply Composition and Material Used:
Indicates the number of plies indicates or
the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The tire designation (the following figures are
examples of a tire designation):
07
M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow; AT = All
Terrain; AS = All Season
07 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard or the safety certification label, located on the B-Pillar or the
driver's door or on the inside of the fuel filler
door on Canadian models, for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades: see page 176 for more information.
Maximum permissible inflation pressure:
the greatest amount of air pressure that
should ever be put in the tire. This limit is
set by the tire manufacturer.
Tire suppliers may have additional markings,
notes or warnings such as standard load, radial
tubeless, etc.
07
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
173
07 Wheels and tires
Glossary of tire terminology
•
•
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer.
•
Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
•
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load
at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tires load
carrying capability.
•
07
Tire information placard: A placard
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tires load carrying capability.
•
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
•
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
•
B-pillar: The structural member at the side
of the vehicle behind the front door.
•
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
to the rim.
•
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
•
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
•
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or
a tire and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
•
Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This
rating is established by the tire manufacturer.
•
Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure
that should ever be put in the tire. This limit
is set by the tire manufacturer.
•
Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that are
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
inflation pressure is affected by the number
of occupants in the vehicle, the amount of
cargo, and the speed at which the vehicle
will be driven for a prolonged period. This
information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's side
B-pillar or on the inside of the fuel filler door
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
174
on Canadian models, and in the tire inflation table in this chapter.
•
Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
07 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance.
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for deter-mining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/ Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard.
Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
Permissible axle weight
The maximum allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
1
•
Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.
A table listing important weight limits for your
vehicle, is in chapter "Dimension and weights".
For the location of the various labels in your
vehicle, see page 258
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
•
Locate the statement "the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.
•
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
NOTE
For trailer towing information, please refer to
the section "Towing a trailer."
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs.)
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must
never exceed its maximum permissible weight.
•
Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX pounds.
•
The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
WARNING
•
Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or catastrophic failure.
•
Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires
that were original equipment on the
vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the originals do
not increase the vehicle's GVW rating
limitations.
07
For "Towing a trailer" see page 151.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
175
07 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE
GRADES
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and many depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving
habits, maintenance practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
07
TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering
(turning) traction.
TEMPERATURE
The temperature grades are AA (the highest),
A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of performance that
all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
176
07 Wheels and tires
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires
Snow chains
•
Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.
•
Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved
snow chains.
•
•
If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires
and wheels are installed and are of a size
different than the original tires and wheels,
chains in some cases CANNOT be used.
Sufficient clearances between chains and
brakes, suspension and body components
must be maintained.
Always follow the chain manufacturer's
installation instructions carefully. Install
chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.
•
Some strap-on type chains will interfere
with brake components and therefore
CANNOT be used.
•
All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front
wheels. Only chains adapted for AWD
models should be used.
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
chain information.
•
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed limit. (Under
no circumstances should you exceed
31 mph (50 km/h)).
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
•
The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.
Snow tires, studded tires1
•
Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire road
grip.
•
Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads
in warm weather. They should be removed
when the winter driving season has ended.
•
Studded tires should be run-in
300-600 miles (500-1000 km) during which
the vehicle should be driven as smoothly
as possible to give the studs the opportunity to seat properly in the tires. The tires
should have the same rotational direction
throughout their entire lifetime.
NOTE
Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter
tires before installing such tires.
Tires for winter use:
•
•
1
cornering, braking, and accelerating. Failure to do so could reduce traction to an
unsafe level or adversely affect handling.
CAUTION
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with
the following restrictions:
Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions are strongly
advised to fit suitable winter tires to help
retain the highest degree of traction.
07
It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during
Where permitted
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
177
07 Wheels and tires
Temporary spare
The spare tire in your vehicle is called a "Temporary Spare".
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard
on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should
be maintained irrespective of which position on
the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used.
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one
can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It
must be replaced as soon as possible by a
standard tire. Road holding and handling
may be affected with the "Temporary
Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).
CAUTION
07
The vehicle must not be driven with wheels
of different dimensions or with a spare tire
other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can
seriously damage your vehicle's transmission.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
178
07 Wheels and tires
Tire rotation
•
Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
unsure about the tread depth.
Tire rotation
Your vehicle has no recommended tire rotation. The following information is intended to
help you understand why.
G020325
Tread set
The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the
tire
Summer and winter tires
•
When switching between summer and
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,
LF = left front, RR = right rear
•
Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.
•
Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
braking properties and ability to force
aside rain, snow and slush.
•
The tires with the most tread should always
be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skidding).
As a tire ages and the rubber cures, front and
rear tires set at different angles. Therefore, if
tires are rotated, the tread will eventually set at
an angle that is a compromise. Even if ride,
handling, and road noise may still seem
acceptable, they may not be optimal. Further,
tires that are rotated, but not on a regular basis,
may actually cause more tire noise, faster tire
wear, and unpleasant changes in steering feel
and vehicle handling.
an aid in detecting a suspension problem. Each
tire, if left in place, tells a story about the suspension. Tire rotation, on the other hand, could
make suspension wear harder to detect. Early
detection is very important, because suspension problems can make tire wear worse.
If you do rotate your tires...
Please follow the tire manufacturer's recommendations, as outlined in the tire manufacturers tire warranty pamphlet.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance
based on your particular driving circumstances.
A tire that can fully adapt to its position will
provide better steering feel, lower tire noise,
and better fuel economy.
Braking stability performance
Your vehicle is driven mainly by the front tires,
which will wear faster. This can be beneficial.
Having more tread on the rear tires will help
reduce oversteer. Oversteer is when a vehicle
wants to keep turning because of momentum
and dynamic forces on its suspension.
07
Suspension wear diagnostics
Every suspension needs periodic inspection
and maintenance. A tire's wear pattern can be
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
179
07 Wheels and tires
G030879
Changing wheels
Jack location in 7-seat models
Jack location in 5-seat models
removing certain optional wheel covers. Consult your Volvo retailer.
NOTE
Changing wheels
Location of jack, five-seat models
07
The jack is located to the right under the rear
hatch in the cargo area floor. Lift this hatch and
release the retaining strap to lift out the jack.
The rear section of the jack's crank and the tool
bag are stowed to the left under the hatch. The
front section of the crank is stored in the tool
bag. The tool bag also contains a tool for
The rear section of the crank is enclosed in
a protective sleeve that should be slid off
before the crank is used. We recommend
reinserting the crank into this sleeve before
the crank is stowed.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional grocery bag holder: Fold up the rear section of the
cargo area floor, disconnect the grocery bag
holder's retaining cords and fold up the lower
section of the floor to access the tool bag.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
180
Location of jack, seven-seat models
The jack is located in the center under the rear
hatch in the cargo area floor. Lift this hatch and
release the retaining strap to slide out the jack.
The rear section of the jack's crank and the tool
bag are stowed to the left under the hatch. The
front section of the crank is stored in the tool
bag.
The rear section of the crank is enclosed in a
protective sleeve that should be slid off before
the crank is used. We recommend reinserting
the crank into this sleeve before the crank is
stowed.
07 Wheels and tires
Changing wheels
CAUTION
Seven-seat models: Do not store objects
in the area for the rear seat cushions (when
the backrests are to be folded down). This
could damage the cushions.
3. Connect the two sections of the jack's
crank.
4. Insert the hooked end of the crank in the
spare wheel retaining attachment.
5. Lower the spare wheel under the vehicle by
turning the crank counterclockwise until it
is not possible to turn it further.
6. Pivot the toggle at the end of the cable 90
degrees to release it from the spare wheel
CAUTION
Lowering the spare wheel
The spare wheel is located under the floor of
the rear cargo compartment. It can be lowered
using the crank (see previous page for location).
WARNING
When raising or lowering the spare wheel,
please keep in mind that components in the
exhaust system may be very hot.
When the spare wheel is mounted on the
vehicle, the retaining cable could damage
the underside of the vehicle if it is not retracted.
7. Crank up the cable again by turning the
crank clockwise.
8. Place the wheel with the flat tire in the vehicle's cargo compartment.
NOTE
To lower the spare wheel:
1. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate.
2. Fold up the rear section of the floor in the
cargo compartment.
The space under the vehicle is designed to
hold the special spare wheel only. Other fullsize wheels will not fit in this compartment.
G026996
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional grocery bag holder: Fold up the rear section of the
cargo area floor, disconnect the grocery bag
holder's retaining cords and fold up the lower
section of the floor.
Returning the spare wheel to the storage
compartment
1. Use the crank (turn it counterclockwise) to
lower the spare wheel's retaining cable.
2. Pass the toggle at the end of the cable
through the center hole in the spare wheel.
Pivot the toggle 90 degrees so that when
raised, the wheel will rest on the toggle.
3. Retract the retaining cable slightly by
slowly turning the crank clockwise several
times.
07
4. Position the wheel so that it is not obstructed by components in the exhaust system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
181
07 Wheels and tires
Changing wheels
5. Continue to raise the wheel by turning the
crank clockwise. Raise the wheel a little bit
at a time and guide it around the rear axle
until it is securely seated in the storage
area.
6. When it is no longer possible to turn the
crank any further, check that the spare
wheel is securely in position in the storage
compartment.
Changing a wheel
WARNING
There is an attachment point on each side
of the vehicle located under the pillars
between the front and rear doors. This point
is used during the production process only,
and is NOT intended for attaching the jack.
•
Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface.
•
Engage the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park position.
•
Loosen the wheel bolts by exerting downward pressure on the lug wrench.
•
Remove the wheel cap (where applicable)
using the lug wrench in the tool bag.
•
With the wheels still on the ground, use the
lug wrench to loosen the wheel bolts
1/2 – 1 turn. Turn the bolts counterclockwise to loosen the bolts.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be driven with
wheels of different dimensions or with a
spare tire other than the one that came
with the vehicle. The use of different size
wheels can seriously damage your vehicle's transmission.
•
Correct tightening torque on wheel
bolts must be observed.
•
The wheel bolts should never be
greased or lubricated.
•
Extended, chromed wheel bolts must
not be used with steel rims, as they
make it impossible to fit the hub caps.
G026997
G020332
•
07
Jack attachment points
Jack attachments
There are two attachment points for the jack on
each side of the vehicle. These attachment
points are under the center of each door.
WARNING
The undersides of accessory running
boards are not intended for attaching the
jack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
182
07 Wheels and tires
G027000
Changing wheels
Attaching the jack
•
Place the jack on the ground, under one of
the attachment points (see the illustration)
and crank while simultaneously guiding the
jack's attachment bracket onto the attachment point (see illustration) The base of the
jack must be flat on a level, firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising the vehicle,
check that the jack is still correctly positioned in the attachment.
•
Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground.
•
Unscrew the wheel bolts completely and
carefully remove the wheel so as not to
damage the threads on the studs.
NOTE
To avoid excessive wear and the necessity
of rebalancing, mark and reinstall wheels in
the same location and position as before
removal. To lessen the chance of imbalance, each wheel hub is equipped with a
guide stud to ensure that a removed wheel
can be reinstalled in its original position (as
when changing over to winter tires/wheels).
3. Install the wheel bolts and tighten handtight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all bolts are snug.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to
102 ft.lbs. (140 Nm).
5. Install the wheel cap (where applicable).
07
Installing the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
183
07 Wheels and tires
Changing wheels
WARNING
07
•
The jack must correctly engage the bar
in the jack attachment. The vehicle's
weight must not rest on the jack attachment. See illustration "Attaching the
jack" on the previous page.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface.
•
Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by
a jack.
•
Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when replacing a wheel. For any other
job, use stands to support the side of
the vehicle being worked on.
•
Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the (P)ark position.
•
Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.
•
The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.
•
No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.
The jack and tools should be returned to their
storage spaces. The jack should be cranked
down fully so that it fits into the intended space.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
184
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
Introduction
The system consists of an air compressor, a
container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire’s
inflation valve.
The 12-volt sockets are located on the rear side
of the center console (in the rear seat) and in
the cargo area.
•
The tire sealing system is only intended
to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not
the sidewall.
•
Tires with large holes or tears cannot be
repaired with the tire sealing system.
WARNING
•
After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
•
Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible to determine if it can
be permanently repaired or must be
replaced.
Accessing the tire sealing system
The tire sealing system is stowed under the
floor of the cargo area. To access it:
•
1. Fold up or remove any protective floor covering or carpet.
2. Open the floor hatch.
3. Lift out the tire sealing system.
Tire sealing system–overview
NOTE
•
The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.
After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.
G020400
Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing
system that enables you to temporarily seal a
hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,
or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.
Speed limit sticker
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Protective hose cover
Air release knob
07
Hose
Bottle with sealing compound
Air pressure gauge
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
185
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
•
•
The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol
and natural rubber-latex. These substances are harmful if swallowed.
•
Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.
If irritation persists, get medical attention.
•
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire
Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.
NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing
system.
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.
•
Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.
Precautions:
•
•
•
Keep out of reach of children.
•
WARNING
Do not ingest the contents.
•
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.
•
Hands should be washed thoroughly
after handling.
Keep the tire sealing system away from
children.
•
Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
•
Apply the parking brake.
First aid:
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the
upper and lower eyelids. Get medical
attention if symptoms occur.
07
Stage 1: Sealing the hole
G014338
•
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
186
1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.
2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it
to the steering wheel hub where it will be
clearly visible to the driver.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
4. Put on the gloves included in the tire sealing system.
WARNING
WARNING
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep
it securely in place and help prevent sealing
compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash
the affected area immediately with soap and
water.
7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the tire sealing system’s hose connector onto the valve as
tightly as possible by hand.
5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle
of sealing compound.
8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
NOTE
9. Start the vehicle’s engine.
10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor
by pressing the on/off switch to position I.
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
WARNING
•
Never stand next to the tire being inflated
when the compressor is in operation.
•
If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.
•
If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.
The vehicle should not be driven if this
occurs. Contact a towing service or
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if
applicable.
NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily
show an increase in pressure to approximately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is being pumped into the tire. The
pressure should return to a normal level
after approximately 30 seconds.
11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch
off the compressor briefly to get a clear
reading from the pressure gauge. The
compressor should not be used for more
than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.
6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
07
``
187
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8
bar) after approximately seven minutes, turn
off the compressor. In this case, the hole is
too large to be sealed and the vehicle should
not be driven.
12. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the sealing compound in the tire.
07
the tire by turning the air release knob
counterclockwise.
NOTE
•
•
Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be used
again to check the tire’s inflation pressure.
The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle
holder. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician to have the
bottle removed and properly disposed
of.
WARNING
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1
hour, check the inflation pressure in the
damaged tire again before continuing.
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering
behavior, or noises should occur while driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a
safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,
cracks, or other visible damage, and
recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure
is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue
driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure
1. Connect the tire sealing system as described in stage 1.
2. Refer to the inflation pressure tablesfor the
correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs
to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s
compressor. If necessary, release air from
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
188
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
Replacing the sealing compound
container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if:
•
the tire sealing system has been used to
repair a tire
•
the container’s expiration date has passed
(see the date on decal).
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
NOTE
•
•
After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system
components must be replaced. Please
consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts.
If the sealing compound bottle’s expiration date has passed, please take it to
a Volvo retailer or a recycling station
that can properly dispose of harmful
substances.
Inflating tires
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate
the tires. To do so:
1. Park the car in a safe place.
2. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the hose connector
onto the valve as tightly as possible by
hand.
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
6. Start the vehicle’s engine.
WARNING
•
•
The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated
place, or outdoors, before using the system.
9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached.
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12volt socket.
Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.
7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to
get a clear reading from the pressure
gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to
be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s
compressor (press the on/off switch to
position I). If necessary, release air from the
tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.
07
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
189
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – U.S. models only
The tire pressure monitoring system uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to check inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit
inflation pressure data to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
USA – FCC ID:
MRXG403MA4A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
When low inflation pressure is detected,
TPMS will light up the tire pressure warning
light (also referred to as a telltale) in the
instrument panel (see page 57), and will display a message in the text window. The
wording of this message is determined by
the degree of inflation pressure loss.
07
A
On certain models, the FCC code is MRXTG315AM04
NOTE
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivI
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
190
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – U.S. models only
NOTE
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does
not replace normal tire maintenance. For
information on correct tire pressure, please
refer to the tables on pages 170 and 171, or
consult your Volvo retailer.
Changing wheels with TPMS
Please note the following when changing or
replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/
tires on the vehicle:
•
Only the factory-mounted wheels are
equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS
sensor.
•
If wheels without TPMS sensors are mounted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed
each time the vehicle is driven above
25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.
•
Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,
the warning message should not reappear.
•
Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be
fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.
Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of
wheels.
Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message has
been displayed, and the tire pressure warning
light has come on:
•
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
inflation pressure of all four tires.
•
Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure
(consult the tire pressure placard or the
table see page 170).
•
Drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster.
This will erase the warning text and the warning
light will go out.
WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire
failure, resulting in a loss of control of the
vehicle.
NOTE
CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press
the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the
valve to help avoid bending or otherwise
damaging the valve.
07
If a tire is changed or if the TPMS sensor is
moved to another wheel, the sensor’s seal,
nut and valve core should be replaced.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
191
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
192
G020920
Washing and cleaning the vehicle......................................................... 194
Paint touch up....................................................................................... 198
CAR CARE
08
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
Washing
•
•
The vehicle should be washed at regular
intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar
spots adhere to the paint and may cause
damage. It is particularly important to wash
the vehicle frequently in the wintertime to
prevent corrosion, when salt has been
used on the roads.
When washing the vehicle, do not expose
it to direct sunlight. Use lukewarm water to
soften the dirt before you wash with a
sponge, and plenty of water, to avoid
scratching.
Dry the vehicle with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.
•
Tar spots can be removed with kerosene
or tar remover after the vehicle has been
washed.
•
A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper
blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility
considerably and also helps prolong the
service life of the wiper blades.
•
When washing or steam cleaning the
engine, avoid spraying water or steam
directly on the electrical components or
toward the rear side of the engine.
•
Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for
example when refueling.
•
During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be closer
to the vehicle than 13 " (30 cm). Do not
spray into the locks.
•
Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel
housings, fenders, etc.).
•
In areas of high industrial fallout, more frequent washing is recommended.
•
•
A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.
•
•
•
A water-soluble grease solvent may be
used in cases of sticky dirt. However, use
a wash place equipped with a drainage
separator.
After cleaning the engine, the spark plug
wells should be inspected for water and
blown dry if necessary.
Always close the moonroof and sun
shade before washing your vehicle.
Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the moonroof.
Suitable detergents
•
Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the moonroof.
CAUTION
Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated
wheels using the same detergents used for
the body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheel
cleaning agents can permanently stain
chrome-plated wheels.
Special vehicle washing detergents should be
used. A suitable mixture is about 2.5 fl. oz.
(8.5 cl) of detergent to 2.6 US gal. (10 liters) of
warm water. After washing with a detergent the
vehicle should be well rinsed with clean water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
194
CAUTION
Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork as
soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may
be permanently damaged.
•
08
•
Special moonroof cautions:
Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning
products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
components such as chromed strips on the
exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for
using these products should be followed care-
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
first six months (because the paint will not
have hardened sufficiently).
fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be
used.
•
CAUTION
•
Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components
•
Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
•
Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used
•
NOTE
When washing the vehicle, remember to
remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors
and sills.
An automatic wash is a simple and quick
way to clean your vehicle, but it is worth
remembering that it may not be as thorough as when you yourself go over the
vehicle with sponge and water. Keeping
the underbody clean is most important,
especially in the winter. Some automatic
washers do not have facilities for washing
the underbody.
Before driving into an automatic car wash,
make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary
lamps, etc, are secure, and that any
antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Otherwise there is risk of the machine dislodging them.
Polishing and waxing
•
Normally, polishing is not required during
the first year after delivery, however, waxing may be beneficial.
•
Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
compound.
•
•
After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
•
Waxing alone does not substitute for polishing a dull surface.
•
A wide range of polymer-based car waxes
can be purchased today. These waxes are
easy to use and produce a long-lasting,
high-gloss finish that protects the bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
•
Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113° F (45° C).
Exterior lighting
WARNING
•
•
When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes
several times in order to remove any
moisture from the brake linings.
Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This
constitutes a fire risk.
Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as
headlights, fog lights, or tail lights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand
moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short
time.
08
Automatic washing – simple and quick
•
Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.
We do NOT recommend washing your
vehicle in an automatic wash during the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
195
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
ted with a special compound that is available at your Volvo retailer.
CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of longlife or durable paint protection coatings,
some of which may claim to prevent pitting,
fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have
not been tested by Volvo for compatibility
with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them
may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,
or cloud. Damage caused by application of
paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty.
Mirrors with the water repellent glass
coating
•
Do not apply wax, degreasing agents, etc
to this glass. This could damage the coating.
•
Clean the glass surface with care to avoid
scratching.
•
This treatment should be carried out for the
first time after three years, and thereafter
once a year.
Cleaning the upholstery
Fabric
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric
stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.
Interior plastic components
Cleaning interior plastic components should
be done with a cleaning agent specially
designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo
retailer.
Alcantera™ suede-like material
NOTE
The water repellent coating is subject to
natural wear
•
08
In order to maintain the coating's water
repellent characteristics, it should be trea-
Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a
soft cloth and mild soap solution.
Leather care
Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured
with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,
sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the
protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and
fading can result.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy
leather care kit formulated to clean and beauI
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
196
tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the
protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner
removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream
protectant restores a barrier against soil and
sunlight.
Volvo also offers a special leather softener that
should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
reduces friction between leather and other finishes in the vehicle.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.
Cleaning leather upholstery
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,
do not rub.
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
Protecting leather upholstery
Cleaning the seat belts
1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on
a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream
to the upholstery with light circular movements.
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild
soap solution.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and
protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.
Cleaning floor mats
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed
clean regularly, especially during winter when
they should be taken out for drying. Spots on
textile mats can be removed with a mild detergent.
CAUTION
•
Under no circumstances should gasoline, naphtha or similar cleaning agents
be used on the plastic or the leather
since these can cause damage.
•
Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring
can spread.
•
Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent can damage the seat padding.
•
Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.
•
Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.
•
Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may stain
the upholstery.
08
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
197
08 Car care
Paint touch up
Color code
Make sure you have the right color. The color
code number is on the model plate in the
engine compartment.
Minor stone chips and scratches
•
•
•
•
•
Primer – can
Paint – touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape
If the stone chip has not gone down to the
bare metal and an undamaged color coat
remains, you can add paint immediately
after removing dirt.
Model plate with paint color code (1).1
Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish
regularly – when washing the vehicle for
instance. Touch-up if necessary.
Paint repairs require special equipment and
skill. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for any extensive damage.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using
Volvo touch-up paint.
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60° F (15° C).
Minor scratches on the surface
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the metal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as
soon as the spot has been cleaned.
The model plate is located on the passenger's side center door pillar.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
198
Deep scratches
•
Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
•
Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with
a small brush. When the primer surface is
dry, the paint can be applied using a brush.
Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin
paint coats and let dry after each application.
NOTE
08
1
G020345
G031024
Material:
If there is a longer scratch, you may want to
protect surrounding paint by masking it off.
08 Car care
08
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
199
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
200
202
203
205
207
208
211
213
214
217
224
G020922
Volvo service.........................................................................................
Maintaining your vehicle.......................................................................
Working on your vehicle........................................................................
Engine compartment.............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids.....................................................................................................
Wiper blades.........................................................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Replacing bulbs....................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
09
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Volvo service
Maintenance service
Maintenance services
Applicable warranties
Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehicle running well. Your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet provides a comprehensive maintenance schedule up to
150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle service.
This maintenance program contains inspections and services necessary for the proper
function of your vehicle, and includes components that affect vehicle emissions. The maintenance services contain several checks that
require special instruments and tools and
therefore must be performed by a qualified
technician. Volvo advises you to follow the
service program outlined in this booklet. To
keep your Volvo in top condition, specify timetested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and
Accessories.
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance
with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
services outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet, many of which
will positively affect your vehicle's emissions,
should be performed as indicated. It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emission
services be retained in case questions arise
concerning maintenance.
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian regulations, the following list of warranties
is provided.
The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
manufacturers to furnish written instructions to
the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet," are not covered by the
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
and material used.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected.
Vehicle Event Data (Black Box)
Your vehicle's driving and safety systems
employ computers that monitor, and share
with each other, information about your vehicle's operation. One or more of these computers may store what they monitor, either during
normal vehicle operation or in a crash or nearcrash event. Stored information may be read
and used by:
•
•
•
•
Volvo Car Corporation
service and repair facilities
law enforcement or government agencies
others who may assert a legal right to
know, or who obtain your consent to know
such information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
202
•
•
•
•
New Car Limited Warranty
•
•
Emission Design and Defect Warranty
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Systems Limited Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
These are the Federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet for
detailed information concerning each of the
warranties.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Maintaining your vehicle
Owner maintenance
As needed
Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
•
The following points can be carried out
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services.
Each time the vehicle is refueled
•
•
Check the engine oil level
Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and tail lights
Monthly
•
•
Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.
Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.
•
Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
•
Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.
•
Visually inspect battery terminals for corrosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end
of its useful service life. Consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician for
additional information.
Wash the vehicle, including the undercarriage, to reduce wear that can be caused
by a buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can
be caused by salt residues.
•
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake
vents at the base of the windshield, and
from other places where they may collect.
•
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
test.
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons.
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
•
If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your
part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.
Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending
on the inspection practices in your area.
•
If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.
Emission inspection readiness
What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II)?
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnostic information about your vehicle's emission
controls. It can light the Check Engine light
(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A
"fault" is a component or system that is not
performing within an expected range. A fault
may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will
store a message about any fault.
How do states use OBD II for emission
inspections?
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
then read "faults." In some states, this type of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
09
How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or
was lit but went out without service, have
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.
•
If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A
half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high``
203
09 Maintenance and servicing
Maintaining your vehicle
09
way driving is typically needed to allow
OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo
retailer can provide you with more information on planning a trip.
•
Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
204
09 Maintenance and servicing
Working on your vehicle
tally friendly way. See page 214 for more
information on handling the battery.
09
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage!
G027001
Hoisting the vehicle
Reinforced lifting points
Note the following before you begin working
on your vehicle:
Battery
•
Ensure that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running (e.g., when replacing the
battery).
•
Never use a fast charger to charge the battery. The battery cables should be disconnected when recharging.
•
The battery contains acid that is both corrosive and poisonous. It is important that
the battery is handled in an environmen-
If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the
two jack attachments points should be used.
They are specially reinforced to bear the weight
of the vehicle (see the illustration). A garage
jack can also be placed under the front of the
engine support frame. Take care not to damage the splash guard under the engine. Ensure
that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle
cannot slide off it. Always use axle stands or
similar structures. The vehicle's gross vehicle
weight is between 5770 lbs (2630 kg) and
6080 lbs (2760 kg). Use a jack and stands rated
for this weight.
If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the
front and rear lift arm pads should be centered
under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard
edge of the sill rail (see illustration).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
The voltage in the ignition system is dangerous!
Do not touch spark plugs, ignition cables or
the ignition coil when the engine is running
or the ignition is switched on!
The ignition should be switched off when:
•
•
Conducting engine tests.
Replacing parts in the ignition system,
such as spark plugs, ignition coil, distributor, ignition cables, etc.
WARNING
Never try to repair any part of the SRS/
SIPS/WHIPS/IC systems yourself. Any
interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. Any work should
only be performed by an authorized Volvo
workshop.
``
205
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Working on your vehicle
Belt check
Check the belt regularly to make sure it is in
good condition and is clean. A worn or dirty belt
can cause poor cooling and low alternator output as well as impair the operation of the power
steering and the air conditioning unit.
NOTE
The drive belt is equipped with a self-tensioning mechanism and requires no adjustment between changes.
WARNING
The engine must not be running when this
check is performed.
and the expansion tank during engine warm up
and cooling.
Changing coolant
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Do not top off with water only. This reduces the
rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the
coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can
also cause damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze. Top off with Volvo Genuine
Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water
and antifreeze.
CAUTION
Check coolant level
The cooling system must be filled with coolant
and not leak to operate at maximum efficiency.
Check the coolant level regularly. The level
should be between the MAX and MIN marks
on the expansion tank. The check should be
made with particular thoroughness when the
engine is new or when the cooling system has
been drained.
Do not remove the filler cap other than for topping up with coolant. Frequent removal may
prevent coolant circulation between the engine
The cooling system must always be kept
filled to the correct level. If it is not kept filled,
there can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage. Different types of antifreeze/coolant may not
be mixed.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
206
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
G027074
Engine compartment
Brake fluid reservoir
Relay/fuse box
Air cleaner
Radiator
WARNING
The cooling fan (located behind the radiator)
may start or continue to operate (for up to
6 minutes) after the engine has been
switched off.
Dipstick-engine oil
Filler cap-engine oil
Washer fluid reservoir
Power steering fluid reservoir
Expansion tank-coolant
Data plate
Battery (under floor in rear cargo area)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
207
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Engine oil
Oil specifications
Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC
specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.
Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel
economy, engine performance, or engine protection.
Oil viscosity (stable ambient
temperatures)
recommended for driving in areas of sustained
temperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, and for prolonged driving in mountainous areas.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
symbol
Volvo recommends Castrol.
NOTE
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal maintenance services. This oil is only used at customer
request, at additional charge. Please consult a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Operation in hot climates
When temperatures exceed 104° F (40° C) in
your area, Volvo recommends, for the protection of your engine, that you use a heavier
weight oil, such as such as SAE 5W-40 or
0W-40. See the viscosity chart.
Operation in temperate climates
Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life.
Under normal use when temperatures do not
exceed 104 ° F (40 ° C), SAE 5W-30 will provide
good fuel economy and engine protection. See
the viscosity chart.
Extreme engine operation
Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40
and complying with oil quality requirements are
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
208
G022917
Oil additives must not be used.
G023491
Depending on your driving habits, premium or
synthetic oils may provide superior fuel economy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo
retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician for recommendations on premium
or synthetic oils.
American Petroleum Institute (API) symbol
The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into
three parts:
•
The upper section describes the oil's performance level.
•
•
The center identifies the oil's viscosity.
The lower section indicates whether the oil
has demonstrated energy-conserving
properties in a standard test in comparison
to a reference oil.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine oil
NOTE
Checking and adding oil
Checking the oil
See page 208 for oil specifications and page
268 for oil volumes. Refer to the Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet for information on the oil change intervals.
NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of oil
additives.
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lintfree rag.
•
Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check
the oil level.
•
Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to
the MIN mark, add approximately
1 US quart (1 liter) of oil.
•
Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
•
Switch off the engine and wait for at least
10-15 minutes and recheck the oil level. If
necessary, add oil until the level is near the
mark.
•
Oil level should be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the dipstick.
G030880
Volvo uses different systems to indicate a
low oil level or pressure. Some models have
an oil pressure sensor, in which case a
warning symbol (see page 56) is used to
indicate low oil pressure. Other models have
an oil level sensor, in which case the driver
is alerted by the warning symbol in the center of the instrument panel and a text in the
information display. Some models use both
systems. Contact a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for more information.
Changing engine oil and oil filter
09
Location of dipstick (1) and oil filler cap (2)
The oil level should be checked every time the
vehicle is refueled. This is especially important
during the period up to the first scheduled
maintenance service.
•
The vehicle should be parked on a level
surface when the oil is checked.
•
If the engine is warm, wait for at least
10-15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off before checking the oil.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
209
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Engine oil
WARNING
G030881
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.
CAUTION
Not checking the oil level regularly can result
in serious engine damage if the oil level
becomes too low.
•
Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This
could cause an increase in oil consumption.
•
Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the oil
level becomes too low.
•
Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
210
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fluids
Changing coolant
CAUTION
G027087
G027097
Washer fluid reservoir
Washer fluid reservoir
Coolant reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment and holds approx.
6.8 US qts (6.5 liters).
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
When there is less than approximately 1 US qt
(1 liter) remaining in the reservoir, the washer
fluid spray will be directed to the windshield
only.
During cold weather, the reservoir should be
filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
09
•
If necessary, top up the cooling system
with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze
only (a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze).
•
Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.
•
If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze.
•
The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there
can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage.
Check coolant regularly!
•
Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a
lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze.
•
Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicles cooling system.
``
211
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fluids
Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F
(280 °C), P/N 9437433.
WARNING
•
Never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle
cools.
•
If it is necessary to top up the coolant
when the engine is warm, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly so that the
overpressure dissipates.
Brake fluid reservoir
Replace: Every second year or 30,000 miles
(48,000 km). The fluid should be replaced once
a year or every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) when
driving under extremely hard conditions
(mountain driving, etc.).
Always entrust brake fluid changing to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Power steering fluid reservoir
ADD
The brake fluid should always be above the
MIN mark on the side of the reservoir. Check,
without removing the cap, that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.
G026991
G000000
FULL
The fluid level should always be between the
ADD and FULL marks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
212
Fluid type: Volvo synthetic power steering fluid
(Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 or equivalent.
Replace: No fluid change required.
If a problem should occur in the power steering
system or if the vehicle has no electrical current
and must be towed, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater
effort will be required to turn the steering
wheel.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Wiper blades
Windshield wiper blades
•
Fold the wiper arm out from the windshield
and hold the wiper blade.
•
Pull the wiper arm rearward, away from the
tailgate window.
•
Press in the grooved catches and pull out
the wiper blade.
•
Pull out the wiper blade as shown in the
illustration.
•
Insert a new wiper blade and ensure that it
is securely in place.
•
Press the new wiper blade into place.
Check that it is properly secured.
NOTE
09
NOTE
The driver's side wiper blade is longer than
the one on the passenger's side.
G026959
Tailgate wiper blade
Keeping the windshield/tailgate window
and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the
wiper blades. see page 194 for washing
instructions.
To change a windshield wiper blade:
To change a tailgate wiper blade:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
213
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
09
Battery maintenance
G030882
G030883
A
Two types of battery may be used and are fully
interchangeable
•
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
floor of the cargo compartment.
Driving habits and conditions, climate, the
number of starts, etc. all affect the service life
and function of the battery. In order for your
battery to perform satisfactorily, keep the following in mind:
1
2
Check the fluid level in each cell in the battery every 24 months or every 15,0001
miles (24,000 km), whichever is sooner.
The fluid should be at the level shown in the
illustration above (A)2. Do not overfill.
•
Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.
•
If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator (A)2.
•
The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.
•
After inspection, be sure the cap over each
battery cell or cover is securely in place.
More frequently in warm climates.
The level indicator inside the battery could be designed in various ways. See illustrations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
214
•
Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and properly tightened. Route
ventilation hose through opening in floor
(see one of the illustrations in "Replacing
the battery" on page 215).
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running, for example when
changing the battery.
•
The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is used
directly on the battery.
•
However, if the battery is being charged via
the connecting points in the engine compartment (see page 141), the battery must
be connected.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
WARNING
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
Symbols
Wear protection goggles
09
No smoking, no open
flames, no sparks
Explosion
See owner’s manual for
details
NOTE
Keep away from children
Replacing the battery
Corrosive
WARNING
REMOVAL OF BATTERY
DISCONNECT
O CABLE FIRST
xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx
xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx
xxxx xxxxx xxxxx
xxxx xx
+
-
DRAIN PIPE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
G027076
Used batteries should be properly disposed
of at a recycling station or similar facility, or
taken to your Volvo retailer.
``
215
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching
off the ignition before disconnecting the
battery so that all information in the vehicle's electrical system can be stored in the
control modules.
3. Remove the retaining bracket and unscrew
the cover over the battery. Wait at least
5 minutes after switching off the ignition
before disconnecting the battery so that all
information in the vehicle's electrical system can be stored in the control modules.
G027075
4. Disconnect the negative (ground) cable
first.
5. Disconnect the positive cable and pull the
ventilation hose from the battery.
7. Connect the positive cable first.
8. Connect the negative (ground) cable.
9. Be sure that the ventilation hose (see right
column) is securely connected to the battery and that the other end of the hose is
properly routed through the ventilation
opening in the floor of the battery compartment.
Ventilation hose
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
216
10. Reinstall the cover and retaining bracket
and screw it securely in place.
6. Lift out the old battery and put a new battery into place.
G030884
09
NOTE
After the battery has been disconnected or
replaced, lock and unlock the vehicle with
the central locking system's remote control
to reactivate such features as the power
windows, moonroof, courtesy lighting, etc.
WARNING
•
The battery generates hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. The
battery is fitted with a ventilation hose
which vents hydrogen gas out of the
battery compartment through a ventilation opening in the bottom of this compartment. If the battery must be
replaced, it is essential that the ventilation hose is properly connected to the
battery and that it is routed through the
ventilation opening provided (see illustration).
•
Be sure the ventilation hose is free of
debris.
•
Only use replacement batteries equipped with a ventilation hose. Consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
When replacing bulbs, keep the following
points in mind:
•
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your
fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit
on the reflector, which will damage it.
•
The optional Active Bi-Xenon headlight
bulbs contain trace amounts of mercury.
These bulbs should always be disposed of
by an authorized Volvo retailer.
•
The following bulbs should only be
replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician:
Replacing high/low beams/turn signal/
parking light bulbs
09
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Open the hood.
WARNING
3. Pull up the retaining pins (see the illustration).
•
The engine should not be running when
changing bulbs.
4. Lift out the lamp housing.
•
When changing in the headlight housing, if the engine has been running just
prior to replacing bulbs, please be
aware that components in the engine
compartment will be hot.
– Active Bi-Xenon headlights,
– Courtesy (dome) lighting,
– Reading lights,
G027083
– Glove compartment lights
– Turn signals and courtesy lights in the side
door mirrors
– High-mounted brake lights
G027081
WARNING
The entire lamp housing must be lifted out
when replacing these bulbs.
Active Bi-Xenon headlights (option) - due to
the high voltage used by these headlights,
these bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
To lift out the lamp housing:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
217
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Replacing bulbs
Location of the bulbs in the headlight
housing
Replacing the low beam bulb (Halogen
headlights)
7. Press the bulb holder into place on the
headlight housing.
8. Reinstall the plastic cap. The letters
"HAUT" on the cap must be upward.
Low beam headlight/Active Bi-Xenon
headlight (option)
1. Remove the plastic cover over the bulb (1)
by turning it counterclockwise.
High beam headlight
2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing
(2).
Turn signal
Parking light
Side marker light
3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by first
moving it to the right and then moving it out
of the way.
4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.
5. Insert the new bulb (without touching the
glass) in the holder.
6. Move the retaining spring up and push it
slightly to the left until it seats properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
218
G027085
G027088
G027082
Replacing the high beam bulb (Halogen
headlights)
1. Remove the rubber cover (1) by pulling it
off.
2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing
(2).
3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by first
moving it to the right and then moving it out
of the way.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
5. Insert the new bulb (without touching the
glass) in the holder.
6. Move the retaining spring up and push it
slightly to the left until it seats properly.
7. Press the bulb holder into place on the
headlight housing.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
pull it out of the headlight housing.
3. Remove the connector from the bulb unit
(2) by pressing the lock tab out and pulling.
4. Connect the connector to the new bulb unit
until it clicks into place.
5. Press a new bulb unit into the headlight
housing and turn it clockwise into place.
8. Press the rubber cover into place.
6. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Replacing parking light/side marker
light bulbs
1. Remove the rubber cover over the bulb (1)
by pulling it off.
2. Pull the bulb straight out.
3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the base
of the new bulb in the grooves in the holder
and press it into place.
4. Press the lamp holder into the place in the
headlight housing and turn it approximately 1/4 turn clockwise.
Replacing the turn signal bulb
G028409
G027090
Replacing the high beam bulb (Active
Bi-Xenon headlights)
1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4
turn counterclockwise and pull it out of the
headlight housing.
G027089
4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.
09
1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4
turn counterclockwise and pull it out of the
headlight housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
219
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Replacing bulbs
2. Press in the bulb slightly and pull it out of
the holder.
3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the base
of the new bulb in the grooves in the holder.
Press it in and turn it slightly clockwise.
4. Press the lamp holder into the place in the
headlight housing and turn it approximately 1/4 turn clockwise.
1. Switch off the ignition.
Back-up light
2. Turn the bulb holder slightly counterclockwise to release it.
Parking light
3. Replace the bulb. The shape of the foot of
the bulb corresponds to the shape of the
bulb holder.
4. Reinstall the bulb holder by turning it
slightly clockwise. The side of the holder
marked TOP should face upward.
Front fog lights
NOTE
Avoid touching the glass on the bulb with
your fingers.
G027094
G027078
Location of tail light bulbs
Parking light
Turn signal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
220
Brake light
NOTE
If the message indicating a burned out bulb
remains in the information display after a
bulb has been replaced, consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
G027077
Replacing bulbs in the taillight cluster
1. Switch off all lights and turn ignition key to
position 0.
2. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate,
and fold up the rear section of the cargo
area floor.
3. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
grocery bag holder, detach the holder's
bands.
4. Remove the corner panel (A in the illustration above).
5. Open the cover (B) in the side panel by
pulling the tab (C) upward/outward.
6. Loosen the bolts (D).
7. Pull the entire tail light housing straight out.
8. Disconnect the wiring.
9. Place the tail light housing on a soft cloth
to avoid scratching the lens.
10. Turn the lamp holder(s) counterclockwise
and pull out.
11. Turn signal, back-up light, brake light
bulbs: Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
14. Place the lamp holder in the groove and
turn clockwise.
15. Press wiring back into place.
16. Align the tail light housing with the holes for
the retaining bolts and press it into place.
17. Tighten the retaining bolts.
18. Reinsert the side and corner panels.
12. Parking light bulbs: Pull the bulb straight
out.
13. Insert a new bulb.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
221
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Carefully insert a small screwdriver (see
illustration above).
3. Pry out the lamp housing.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove it.
5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
The door step courtesy lights are located under
the dashboard on the driver's and passenger's
sides.
To replace a bulb:
1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry out
the lens.
2. Replace the defective bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
6. Insert a new bulb and press the lamp housing back into place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
222
Cargo compartment light
G027084
Door step courtesy lights
G027093
Rear fog light
G027079
09
1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry out
the lens.
2. Pry out the bulb and replace it.
3. Press the lens back into place.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
License plate lights
Vanity mirror lights
09
NOTE
1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry out
the lens.
2. Pry out the bulb and replace it.
3. Carefully press the lower edge of lens onto
the four tabs and press the upper edge of
the lens into place.
G030886
G027080
Other bulbs may be difficult for you to
replace yourself. Let a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician replace these
bulbs if necessary.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Loosen the screws with a Torx screwdriver.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
pull it out.
4. Pull out the defective bulb and insert a new
one.
5. Reinsert the bulb holder into the housing
and turn it clockwise.
6. Reinstall the housing and screw it into
place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
223
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
5
Relays/fuse box in the engine compartment
Fuse box in the passenger compartment,
behind the plastic cover
Fuse box in the passenger compartment,
on the edge of the dashboard
Fuse box in the cargo compartment
Auxiliary fuse box in the cargo compartment *certain markets only(
If an electrical component fails to function, it is
possible that a fuse has blown.
The fuse boxes are located in four different
places, see the illustration above.
A label on the inside of each cover indicates the
amperage and the electrical components that
are connected to each fuse.
The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to
remove it. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is
difficult to remove, you will find a special fuse
removal tool (and several extra fuses) in the
passenger compartment fuse box on the driver's end of dashboard. From the side, examine
the curved metal wire (see the illustration) to
see if it is broken. If so, put in a new fuse of the
same color and amperage (written on the
fuse). Spare fuses are stored in the fuse box in
the engine compartment and the passenger
compartment. If fuses burn out repeatedly,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
224
G026981
Replacing fuses
have the electrical system inspected by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage
or overload the vehicle's electrical system.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
G026972
Fuses in the engine compartment
When replacing fuses, be sure to replace a
blown fuse with a new one of the same color
and amperage (written on the fuse).
No
A
1
ABS
30
2
ABS
30
3
Headlight washers
35
4
–
20
5
Auxiliary lights (option)
35
No
A
6
Starter motor relay
25
7
Windshield wipers
15
8
Fuel pump
15
9
Transmission control module
(V8 and 6-cyl.)
15
10
Ignition coils, engine control
module
20
11
Throttle pedal sensor, A/C
compressor, e-box fan
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
No
A
12
Engine control module, fuel
injectors, mass airflow sensor
15
13
Throttle control (V8), Intake
manifold actuator (6-cyl.)
10
14
Heated oxygen sensor
20
15
Crankcase ventilation, solenoid valves, A/C connection,
leakage diagnostics, engine
control module (V8, 6-cyl.),
mass airflow sensor (V8)
15
``
225
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
No
A
16
Driver's side low beam headlight
20
17
Passenger's side low beam
headlight
20
18
–
19
Engine control module feed,
engine relay
20
Parking lights
15
21
Vacuum pump
20
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
226
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
G032316
Fuses in the passenger compartment on the edge of the dashboard
The decal shows the positions and amperage of the fuses
Fuses are located inside the access panel on
the edge of the dashboard, on the driver's side.
There are also a number of spare fuses. When
replacing a blown fuse, be sure to replace it
with a new one of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse).
No
No
Blower – climate system
30
2
Audio amplifier (option)
30
3
Power driver's seat (option)
25
No
4
Power passenger's seat
(option)
25
5
Driver's door – central locking, power windows, door
mirror
25
6
Front passenger's door – central locking, power windows,
door mirror
25
7
–
A
1
A
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
A
8
Radio, CD player
15
9
Volvo Navigation System
(option), Sirius satellite radio
(option), Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) - option
10
10
On-board diagnostics, headlight switch, steering wheel
angle sensor, steering wheel
module
5
``
227
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
No
A
11
Ignition switch, SRS, engine
control module (V8, 6-cyl.)
immobilizer, transmission
control module (V8, 6-cyl.)
7.5
12
Ceiling lighting, upper electronic control module
10
13
Moonroof (option)
15
14 –
38
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
228
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
G028412
Fuse box in the passenger compartment, behind the plastic cover, driver's side
This fuse box is located behind the plastic
cover below the steering wheel. When replacing a blown fuse, be sure to replace it with a
new one of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse).
No
1
2
No
A
No
5
Audio system
10
6
–
7
–
8
Alarm siren (option)
5
9
Break light switch feed
5
A
Heated passenger's seat
Heated driver's seat
15
15
10
3
Horn
4
–
15
Instrument panel, climate system, power driver's seat,
Occupant Weight Sensor
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
A
11
12-volt sockets – front and rear
seats
12
–
13
–
14
–
15
ABS, DSTC
16
Power steering, Active BiXenon headlights (option)
15
5
10
``
229
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
No
A
No
17
Driver's side front foglight
(option)
7,5
18
Passenger's side front foglight
(option)
7,5
19
–
20
Coolant pump (V8)
21
Transmission control module1
10
22
Driver's side high beam1
10
23
Passenger's side high beam
10
24
–
25
–
26
–
27
–
28
Power passenger's seat
(option)
29
–
30
Blind Spot Information System
(option)
31
–
5
A
32
–
33
Vacuum pump
20
34
Pump – windshield and tailgate washers
15
35
–
36
–
5
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
230
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
G032342
Fuses in the cargo compartment
The fuses in the cargo area are located behind
the panel on the driver's side of the cargo compartment. When replacing a blown fuse, be
sure to replace it with a new one of the same
color and amperage (written on the fuse).
No
Backup lights
10
2
Parking lights, foglights, cargo
compartment lighting, license
plate lights, brake light diodes
20
Accessories
15
A
4
–
5
Rear Electronic module
10
6
Rear Seat Entertainment
(accessory)
7,5
7
Rear Seat Entertainment
(accessory)
15
12-volt socket in cargo compartment
15
A
1
3
No
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
No
A
9
Rear passenger's side door –
power window, power window
cutout function
20
10
Rear driver's side door – power
window, power window cutout
function
20
11
–
12
–
13
–
``
231
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
Fuses
No
A
No
A
29
Driver's side trailer lighting:
parking lights, turn signal
(option)
25
30
Passenger's side trailer lighting: brake light, fog light, turn
signal (option)
25
31
Main fuse: fuses 37 and 38
40
15
32
–
20
33
–
–
34
–
22
–
35
–
23
Park assist
36
–
24
–
37
Heated rear window
20
25
–
38
Heated rear window
20
26
Park assist (option)
27
Main fuse: trailer wiring, park
assist, All Wheel Drive
30
28
Central locking system
15
14
Subwoofer (option), rear air
conditioning system (option)
15
–
16
–
17
Accessory audio
18
–
19
Rear window wiper
20
Trailer wiring (15-feed) - option
21
15
5
7,5
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
232
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
233
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
234
236
237
242
244
248
249
252
253
G020924
Audio system overview.........................................................................
Audio system controls..........................................................................
Radio functions.....................................................................................
Sirius satellite radio...............................................................................
Auxiliary equipment...............................................................................
CD player/changer................................................................................
Menu structure......................................................................................
Rear Seat Entertainment - Dual Screen (RSE)–option .........................
AUDIO
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10 Audio
Audio system overview
G027144
10
On/Off
Volume
CD player
AM/FM – for switching between FM1, FM2
and AM
Display - clean with a dry, soft, lint-free
cloth.
ENTER – select in the menu or activate a
selection
MY KEY – programmable key for your
favorite function from the menu
SELECTOR – select sound source
EXIT/CLEAR – step back in the menu or
cancel a selection
Infrared (IR) port – for the optional navigation system remote control
Menu selections/navigation
Seek/change tracks or stations
CD eject
CD slot, CD changer (option)
Storage compartment
SCAN
AUTO – search for and store the strongest
radio stations in the area in which you are
driving
Station preset buttons/CD changer discs
(1 – 6)
SOUND – make sound settings
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
236
10 Audio
Audio system controls
Accessing and using menus
Steering wheel keypad
•
One long press on EXIT/CLEAR exits
menu mode.
•
A short press on the EXIT/CLEAR enables
you to cancel, undo, or answer no to a
menu selection, or to go back in the menu
structure.
10
Shortcut
The four buttons on the steering wheel keypad
can be used to control the audio system. The
steering wheel keypad can be used to adjust
volume, shift between preset stations and
change CD tracks.
•
•
Press the
or
buttons briefly
to search for a radio station, or to go to the
next/previous track on a CD.
Press and hold down these buttons to
search within a track.
G027112
G027135
The menu alternatives are numbered and can
be accessed directly by pressing the respective keys on the numbered keypad on the left
side of the audio panel.
In menu mode, you can change settings and
program new functions in the audio system.
The various menu alternatives are shown in the
display, and the current level in the menu structure is shown at the upper right corner of the
display.
Press the MENU button to enter menu mode.
Use the menus as follows:
•
•
Use the menu arrow keys
to navigate
up or down in the menus. Dots in the display indicate that there are more menu
selections from which to choose.
Press ENTER to confirm or cancel a menu
selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MY KEY – programming a shortcut
Use the MY KEY button to program a favorite
function from the menu, such as RANDOM,
etc.
1. Use the MENU buttons to scroll among the
functions.
2. Select the desired function from the menu
by pressing the MY KEY button for more
than two seconds.
3. When MY KEY STORED is shown in the
display, the function has been stored.
4. Activate the function by briefly pressing the
MY KEY button.
Repeat steps 1 – 4 to store new functions on
the MY KEY buttons.
``
237
10 Audio
Audio system controls
Two sets of headphones can be plugged into
each connector.
NOTE
10
The MY KEY buttons can only be programmed for one shortcut function at a
time.
1. With the audio system switched on, use
the SEL button to select a sound source.
Headphones – limitations
•
The headphones will only work when the
ignition key is in position I or higher.
•
If a set of headphones is connected to the
same source that is being sent through the
speakers, the headphone controls cannot
be used to change track or station. This is
to prevent the driver from being distracted
by an unexpected change in music.
•
If the driver selects the same sound source
as someone listening to this source
through headphones, the driver takes control of the sound source.
•
Only one disc in the optional CD changer,
and one track on the CD can be played at
a time.
•
Headphone users can choose from among
the preset radio stations (AM, FM1, FM2)
previously set by the driver.
•
If FM is played in the speakers, AM is not
available and vice versa.
2. Press the arrow keys briefly to change CD
tracks or switch between preset stations.
Rear headphone connectors and
controls (option)
3. Hold down the arrow keys to fast forward/
reverse, or search for the previous/next
strong radio station.
4. Hold down the SEL button to turn off the
sound.
G026982
NOTE
The door panels behind the second row of
seats can be equipped with headphone connectors for passengers in the second and
optional third row of seats. Several people can
listen to different sound sources, such as CDs
or the radio at the same time without disturbing
each other.
For the best sound reproduction, we recommend headphones with impedance
between 16 – 32 ohm. The sensitivity of
these should be equal to or greater than
102 dB. The headphone connections are
intended for 3.5 mm contacts and are
located under the lower edge of the socket.
All headphones are automatically turned off
when the ignition is switched off. They must be
manually restarted when the ignition is
switched on again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
238
10 Audio
Audio system controls
Volume control
On/Off button
Sound settings
Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the volume. The volume
control is electronic and has no end position.
Volume can also be raised (+) or lowered (–)
using the steering wheel keypad.
10
Pause mode
To activate the system:
Selecting a sound source
•
Press AM/FM
repeatedly to toggle
between FM1, FM2, and AM
•
Press the CD button
to change to the
CD player or optional CD changer
•
Turn the SELECTOR control
to choose
FM1, FM2, AM, CD, CD changer (option),
AUX (option), or the optional Sirius satellite
radio.
1. Turn the ignition key to position I.
NOTE
If you switch off the ignition while the audio
system is on, the system will be on when the
ignition is switched on again.
2. Press the POWER button
audio system on or off.
The selected sound source will be shown in the
display.
to switch the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
G027147
G027146
If the volume is turned off, the CD player will go
into pause mode. Re-activate the player by
turning up the volume.
1. Press the SOUND button
repeatedly
until you come to the setting that you wish
to change. Choose BASS, TREBLE,
FADER, BALANCE, SUBWOOFER
(option), CENTER (option) or
SURROUND (option).
2. Use the SELECTOR control
to adjust
the level of the setting you have selected.
The display shows a scale from min. to
max. position. The center indicates the
normal position.
``
239
10 Audio
Audio system controls
NOTE
10
Sound level for the center speaker can only
be set if Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II) or threechannel stereo (3-CH) is selected in the
menu.
Sound level for the subwoofer can only be set
if SUBWOOFER is selected in the menu (activated).
Setting
Shown in the display
Bass
BASS
Treble
TREBLE
Balance between
the right and left
speakers
BALANCE
Balance between
the front and rear
speakers
FADER
Bass speaker level
SUBWOOFER
(option)
Setting
Shown in the display
Center speaker level
CENTER (Premium
Sound system only)
Surround sound
level
SURROUND (Premium Sound system
only)
SURROUND MODE
Surround sound settings are used to balance
sound levels throughout the vehicle. Surround
settings for the various sound sources are
made separately.
There are three settings for surround sound.
•
•
•
PRO LOGIC II
3-CHANNEL
OFF (2-channel stereo)
The
symbol in the display indicates that
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is activated.
•
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions in
CD mode only.
•
2-channel stereo is recommended for AM/
FM radio broadcasts.
•
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only available on the highest level audio system –
Premium Sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
240
Use the following instructions to select PRO
LOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, or to turn these functions off. See also the menu structure on page
252.
1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2. Select CD SURROUND and press
ENTER.
3. Select PRO LOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, or
OFF and press ENTER.
4. The symbol
PL II is displayed when
Pro Logic II is selected.
5. 3-CH is displayed when 3-channel stereo
is selected.
6. OFF indicates normal stereo mode.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
"Dolby Surround Pro Logic II", and the doubleD symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby Surround
Pro Logic II is manufactured under licence from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
10 Audio
Audio system controls
Bass speaker – SUBWOOFER (option)
The subwoofer helps the system provide fuller
sound and deeper bass.
1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2. Select EQ- REAR and press ENTER.
1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
3. Use the menu selection buttons to set the
level or use the SELECTOR control.
2. Select SUBWOOFER and press ENTER.
4. Press ENTER to select the next frequency.
You can select five frequencies
See page 239 for information on setting the
subwoofer level.
Equalizer FR
5. Press ENTER until you come to the menu
mode to save the changes you have made.
EQ – FRONT (certain audio systems)
Optimal sound reproduction
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
from the front speakers.
The audio system is calibrated for optimal
sound reproduction through the use of digital
signal processing. This calibration takes into
account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the seating position of the listener, etc., for
each combination of vehicle and audio system.
There is also dynamic calibration that takes
into account the setting of the volume control,
radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. The
sound settings described in this manual, such
as BASS, TREBLE, and EQUALIZER are only
intended to enable the user to adapt sound
reproduction to his/her personal preferences.
1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
2. Select Equalizer FR and press ENTER.
3. Use the menu selection buttons to set the
level or use the SELECTOR control.
4. Press ENTER to select the next frequency.
You can select five frequencies.
5. Press ENTER until you come to the menu
mode to save the changes you have made.
10
Equalizer RR
EQ – REAR (certain audio systems)
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
from the rear speakers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
241
10 Audio
Radio functions
Station search
ing wheel keypad). MAN will be shown in
the display. The radio will slowly scroll in
the desired direction and then increase
speed after a few seconds.
10
2. Release the button when the desired frequency is displayed.
3. If you need to adjust the frequency, press
or
briefly on
.
Frequency ranges
Radio
Frequency band
FM
87.7 – 107.9 MHz
AM
530 – 1710 kHz
Automatically storing stations –
AUTOSTORE
1. Choose radio mode AM/FM1/FM2 using
the SELECTOR control
or the AM/FM
button
.
2.
Press briefly on
or
to search
for the next strong station. The radio will
search for the next audible station and then
stop.
3. Press one of the buttons again to start a
new search.
Storing stations
To store a selected station under one of the
station setting buttons 0 – 9
:
1. Set the desired station.
2. Press the button under which the station is
to be stored and keep it depressed. The
sound will be interrupted for several seconds and STATION STORED is shown in
the display. The station is now stored.
You can store up to 10 stations each for AM,
FM1 and FM2, i.e. a total of 30 stations.
Manually search for a known frequency
1.
Press and hold the
or
button
(or the corresponding buttons on the steerI
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
242
G027149
G027148
The manual search function is available for five
seconds after you last pressed the button.
This function automatically searches for, and
stores up to 10 strong AM or FM stations in a
separate memory. If more than 10 stations are
found, the 10 strongest ones will be stored. The
function is especially useful in areas in which
you are not acquainted with radio stations or
their frequencies.
10 Audio
Radio functions
Starting autostore
SCAN
Radio text
1. Choose a frequency band with the AM/
FM button.
This function automatically searches the currently selected waveband (AM, FM1, or FM2)
for strong stations. When the radio finds a station, it will pause for approximately 8 seconds,
after which it will continue scanning.
Certain stations broadcast program information, which can be shown in the display.
2. Press and hold down the AUTO button
until AUTOSTORING is shown in the
display.
When AUTOSTORING is no longer displayed,
the autostore process is complete. The automatically stored stations can be selected withe
the preset (number) keys If there are no stations
with sufficient signal strength, NO AST
FOUND is displayed.
Stopping autostore
Activating/deactivating Scan
1. Choose a waveband by pressing the AM/
FM button.
2. Press SCAN
display.
Storing a station found by SCAN
Stations can be stored on the preset buttons
while the SCAN function is activated.
The radio will remain in Autostore mode until
AUTO, EXIT, or AM/FM is pressed.
2. Select RADIOTEXT in the menu and press
ENTER.
Select RADIOTEXT again to deactivate.
3. Press EXIT to stop scanning.
Selecting an autostored station
2. Press one of the preset buttons (0 – 9).
1. Press the MENU button.
. SCAN will be shown in the
Press EXIT.
1. Press AUTO (1) briefly. AUTO will be displayed.
10
•
Press a preset button and hold it down until
Station stored is displayed.
This deactivates SCAN and the stored station
can be selected by pressing the preset button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
243
10 Audio
Sirius satellite radio
Listening to satellite radio
10
The optional Sirius satellite system consists of
a number of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous orbit.
NOTE
•
•
The digital signals from the Sirius satellites are line-of-sight, which means that
physical obstructions such as bridges,
tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere
with signal reception.
Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or
in a ski box, or other antennas that may
impede signals from the SIRIUS satellites.
Selecting Sirius radio mode
1. Press Power to switch on the audio system (see page 236 for information on the
standard radio functions).
2. Turn the SELECTOR dial until Sirius 1 or 2
is displayed.
Activating Sirius radio
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
audio, which means that the channel is
unsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed
(see also "Selecting a channel" in the right
column).
2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press
AUTO to display this number. It is also
possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the
MENU.
NOTE
The channel categories are automatically
updated several times a year. This takes
approximately two minutes and will interrupt normal broadcasting. A message will
be displayed while updating is in progress.
Information on channel or feature updates is
available at www.sirius.com.
SIRUS ID
The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the
Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your
account and when making any account transactions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred
to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).
Selecting a channel
There are two ways of tuning in a channel:
•
This function displays the 12-digit SIRIUS ID.
Selecting a channel category
1. Select Sirius radio mode as described
above.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll
through the list of categories.
4. Press ENTER to select a category.
and
buttons to
Use the
select a channel in the currently chosen
category.
The category "All" is default, which enables
you to scroll through the entire list of available satellite channels.
4. "UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will be
displayed while the subscription is being
updated, after which the display will return
to the normal view.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
244
5.
•
By pressing and holding the
and
buttons to start the scroll function.
The scrolling function begins slowly and
increases speed after approximately
5 seconds. Release the button to listen to
the currently displayed channel.
Through direct channel entry
Direct channel entry
The Sirius satellite channels are numbered
consecutively throughout all of the categories.
To access a channel directly:
10 Audio
Sirius satellite radio
1. Press MENU and scroll to Direct channel
entry.
2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the
channel's number. Press EXIT if necessary
to erase a digit.
3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this
channel, even if it belongs to a category
other than the currently selected one.
Storing a channel
A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;
10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2. See page
242 for detailed information on storing channels.
•
•
NOTE
The numbers of skipped or locked channels
will not be displayed.
•
If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel can
be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"
on page 246.
Scanning
SCAN automatically searches through the list
of satellite channels. see page 242 for more
detailed information.
A long press on one of the number keys
stores the currently tuned channel on that
key.
A short press on a number key while the
radio is in Sirius 1 or 2 mode will tune to the
preset satellite channel stored on that button, regardless of the currently selected
channel category.
Song Seek and Song Memory
The Song Seek and Song Memory functions
provide both audio and visual notification when
Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.
Song Seek enables you to store the name of
the song for future advance notification when
that song is being played. The Song Memory
feature makes it possible to view all of the current songs that are stored in memory.
2. Scroll to "Add song to song mem." and
follow the instructions shown in the display.
10
If a new song is selected when the memory is
full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to
delete the last song on the list.
The remaining songs in the list will move down
one position, and the newly added song will be
placed at the top of the list.
Song seek
When a satellite radio channel plays one of the
songs stored in the song memory, the listener
will be alerted by a text message and an audible signal.
Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT to
cancel.
To activate/deactivate the song seek function:
1. Press MENU
2. Scroll to "Song seek"
3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the
function.
Song memory
Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's
memory.
1. Press MENU.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
NOTE
When the song has ended, the radio will
remain tuned to the channel on which the
song was played.
``
245
10 Audio
Sirius satellite radio
Radio text
10
The text that is displayed about the song currently playing can be changed. Use the AUTO
button to switch between Artist, Title, Composer, or to switch radio text off, or use the
menu to display and select among these categories.
•
Your Sirius ID can be displayed
Skip options
This function is used to remove a channel from
the list of available channels.
Skip current channel
1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and press
ENTER.
Advanced settings
This menu function enables you to make settings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.
To access this menu:
2. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
3. Skip channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER.
1. Press MENU.
Unskip all channels
2. Select Adv. settings.
This permanently removes all channels from
the skip list and makes them available for
selection.
WARNING
Settings should be made when the vehicle
is at a standstill.
The following settings can be made in the Sirius menu.
•
•
•
•
1
Songs can be added to the song list
Channel skip settings can be made
Channel lock settings can be made
The channel access code can be displayed
or changed
Temp. unskip all ch.
This function will temporarily unskip all channels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the skip list and will again
be skipped the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Channel lock
Access to specific channels can be restricted
(locked). A locked channel will not provide
audio, song titles, or artist information.
The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
246
NOTE
All channels are initially unlocked at delivery.
Locking a channel:
1. Select "Adv. settings" in the menu and
select LOCK OPTIONS and press
ENTER.
2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and press
ENTER
3. Enter the channel access code1 and press
ENTER.
4. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
5. Lock channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER.
The channel is now locked and a checked box
will be displayed to indicate this. It will be necessary to enter the channel access code. See
the section "Unlocking a channel" in order to
listen to a locked channel.
Unlocking a channel
A channel's access code1 is required to unlock
a channel.
10 Audio
Sirius satellite radio
Unlock all channels
This permanently removes all channels from
the locked list and makes them available for
selection.
Temp. unlock all ch.
This function will temporarily unlock all channels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the locked list and will
again be locked the next time the ignition is
switched on.
2. Press and hold the ENTER button for
2 seconds.
The current code will be displayed.
10
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
assistance.
CHANGE CODE
This function makes it possible to change the
channel access code. The default code is
0000.
To change the code:
1. Select CHANGE CODE and press
ENTER.
2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.
3. Enter the new code and press ENTER.
4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text
"Incorrect code!" is displayed.
If you have forgotten the access code
1. Select "SIRIUS ID" in the Sirius settings
menu and press ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
247
10 Audio
Auxiliary equipment
4. Set your music player's headphone volume to three-quarters using the player's
volume controls.
10
5. Select AUX VOLUME in the menu and
press ENTER.
G027150
G027029
6. Adjust the volume with SELECTOR
or
with the up/down arrows
and press
ENTER.
Auxiliary connector port
7. If there is distortion, lower your music player's headphone volume until the distortion
goes away.
Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio volume to a comfortable level.
Auxiliary sound level
AUX (option)
The AUX (auxiliary) port can be used to connect, for example, an mp3 player.
Turn the SELECTOR control (see the illustration on page 236) to choose AUX.
If the player is being charged through a 12-volt
socket while it is connect to the AUX port,
sound quality may be impaired.
The volume of the external sound source AUX
may be different from the volume of the internal
sound sources such as the CD player or the
radio.
If the external sound source's volume is too
high, the quality of the sound may be impaired.
This can be prevented by adjusting the external
sound source's input volume.
1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower the
audio volume to about one-quarter.
2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio system.
3. Connect the headphone output from your
music player to the AUX input using a cable
with a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at both
ends.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
248
NOTE
This cannot be done with the steering wheel
keypad.
The cover over the cup holders should be
open when an auxiliary device is connected.
10 Audio
CD player/changer
mode when it is switched on, the CD will play
automatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:
1. Select an empty position using the station
setting buttons 1 – 6. INSERT DISC will be
displayed. Be sure this text is displayed
before inserting a disc. The numbers of
positions already containing discs are
shown in the display.
G027151
2. Insert a CD into the slot
3. Select the CD mode using the
or the CD button
SELECTOR control
.
CD player
CD player
If a CD is in the slot and the audio system is in
CD mode when it is switched on, the CD will be
played automatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:
.
2. Select the CD mode using the
or the CD button
SELECTOR control
.
CD changer (option)
The CD changer can hold up to six discs.
If a CD position in the changer containing a disc
is selected, and the audio system is in CD
A long press on the EJECT button
the EJECT ALL function.
starts
10
The text EJECTING ALL will be displayed and
the entire magazine will be emptied disc by
disc.
Pause
To pause CD playback, turn the volume all the
way down. "CD paused" will be displayed.
This will not occur if someone in the rear seat
is listening to the CD through the optional
headphones.
Play will resume when the volume is turned up
again.
Ejecting CDs
Playing a CD
1. Insert a CD into the slot
.
Ejecting all discs
Audio files
Press the EJECT button
to eject the CD.
CD changer
In addition to playing normal music CDs, the
CD player/changer can also play discs containing files in mp3 or wma format.
Ejecting one disc
A short press on the EJECT button (3) will
eject the CD that is currently playing.
NOTE
For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected CD
must be removed within 12 seconds or it will
be automatically drawn back into the slot
and the CD player will enter pause mode.
Press the CD button to restart the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
NOTE
Certain discs that are copy protected cannot be read by the player.
When a disc with audio files is inserted in the
player, the player scans the disc's folders
before it begins playing the files. The length of
time that this takes depends on the quality of
the disc.
``
249
10 Audio
CD player/changer
Navigating the disc and playing tracks
10
If a disc with audio files is in the CD player,
press ENTER to display a list of folders on the
disc.
Use the up and down arrows to move among
the folders on the disc. Audio files have the
symbol and folders containing these
files have the
symbol.
Press ENTER to play a selected folder or a file.
When the music file has been played, the
player will continue to play the rest of the files
in the current folder. When all of the files in the
folder have been played, the player will automatically go to the next folder and play the files
in it.
NOTE
Press
or
if the entire name of
the current track does not fit in the display.
Changing tracks
CD player/CD changer
1.
2.
wheel keypad can be used in the same
way.
If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being
played
Select DISC or FOLDER in the menu and
Press and hold down
or
to
search within a track/file. The search continues as long as the buttons are
depressed. The steering wheel keypad can
be used in the same way.
press ENTER.
SCAN
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each track or file1.
1. Press SCAN to begin scanning the tracks
or files on the currently selected CD.
2. Press EXIT/CLEAR or SCAN to interrupt
the scan function and listen to an entire
track or file.
Random play
CD player
CD changer
This function offers two alternatives for playing
the tracks on the disc(s) in the CD changer in
random order (shuffle).
• SINGLE DISC (random order on the currently selected disc)
• ALL DISCS (random order on all of the
CDs in the changer)
If a normal music CD is being played
• Select RANDOM in the menu and press
ENTER.
•
Select SINGLE DISC or ALL DISCS and
press ENTER.
NOTE
This function plays the tracks or files on a CD
in random order (shuffle).
If a normal music CD is being played
Select RANDOM in the menu and press
ENTER.
Briefly press
or
to go to the
next/previous track or file. The steering
Press to play the next randomly selected
track. This can only be done on the currently
selected disc.
If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being
played
Select SINGLE DISC or FOLDER in the menu
and press ENTER.
1
CD changer: SCAN only functions on the currently selected disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
250
10 Audio
CD player/changer
This function is deactivated when a new disc is
selected.
•
Disctext
Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with a
soft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from the
center outwards. If necessary, dampen the
cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thoroughly before using.
Certain CDs contain information about the
disc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. This
information can be shown in the display by
activating the DISCTEXT function.
•
Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liquid. Use only cleaners specifically made for
CD's.
1. Press the MENU button.
•
2. Select DISCTEXT in the menu and press
ENTER.
Use discs of the correct size only (3.5"
discs should never be used).
•
3. Any information that may be stored on the
disc will be displayed.
Volvo does not recommend the use of
plastic outer rings on the disc.
•
Condensation may occur on discs/optical
components of the changer in cold winter
weather. The disc can be dried with a
clean, lint-free cloth. Optical components
in the CD changer may, however, take up
to one hour to dry off.
To deactivate this function, select DISCTEXT
and press ENTER.
Compact disc care
•
Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself.
They could become stuck in the player.
•
Never attempt to play a disc which is damaged in any way.
•
Use CD standard EN 60908 discs only.
Discs not meeting this standard may cause
problems with system (poor sound). CDR
discs can cause listening problems due to
the quality of the disc or recording equipment used.
•
When not in use, the discs should be
stored in their covers. Avoid storing discs
in excessive heat, direct sunlight or dusty
locations.
•
DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc
(combined CD/DVD) does not meet CD
specifications and may not play in your
audio system.
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
251
10 Audio
Menu structure
FM Menu
10
1. Radio Text
2. Audio Settings1
1. Surround
2. Subwoofer (option)
3. Equalizer Fr
4. Equalizer Rr
5. Reset All
AM Menu
See Audio Settings i the FM Menu.
CD Menu
1. Random
2. Disc Text
3. Audio Settings
See Audio Settings in the FM Menu.
AUX Menu (option)
1. AUX input vol
2. Audio Settings
See Audio Settings in the FM Menu
1
Certain audio systems
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
252
10 Audio
Rear Seat Entertainment - Dual Screen (RSE)–option
Introduction
The RSE system can be used at the same time
as the vehicle’s audio system.
When the rear seat passengers play a DVD,
connect an external device to the RSE AUX
connectors, etc., and listen to the audio
through the cordless headphones, the driver
and front seat passenger can still use the vehicle's audio system to listen to the radio, a CD,
music stored on an MP3 player, etc.
Please also refer to the Quick Guide provided
with the RSE system for additional information.
Electrical current - ignition key
The RSE system can be activated with the ignition in position I or II (see page 135 for information on the ignition positions), or when the
engine is running. While the engine is being
started, a film or music that is currently being
played will pause momentarily and resume
playing when the engine has started.
When the RSE system has been used once
when the ignition is switched off, it will be then
be blocked for further use. RSE can be restarted by turning the ignition key to position I.
Selecting a folder on the CD
NOTE
Using RSE for more than approximately
10 minutes with the engine switched off may
drain the vehicle’s battery and make it difficult or impossible to start the engine.
If this occurs, a message will be displayed
on the RSE system’s screens.
1. Insert the CD in the player.
2.
Press
10
.
3. Use the navigation buttons (the arrow keys
surrounding the OK button on the RSE
remote control) to highlight a folder and/or
a specific track.
Music
4.
Listening to a music CD
Playback alternatives
1. Insert a CD into the RSE player’s slot with
the disc’s label facing upward.
> The CD will begin to play automatically.
The CD can be played in several different ways.
Use the navigation buttons to select one of the
alternatives.
2. Switch on the cordless headphones and
select CH A for the left screen or CH B for
the right screen.
> This will direct the sound to the headphones.
With the dialogue box displayed:
3. Adjust the headphone volume by using the
thumb wheel on the headphones.
3.
To listen through the vehicle’s audio system speakers, press MODE on the audio
system control panel and select AUX.
A B on the RSE remote to route
Press
the sound through the speakers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Press
to select a sub-folder.
1. Press the right navigation button to access
the menu to the right..
2. Use the navigation keys to select one of the
alternatives.
Confirm your choice by pressing
.
Changing tracks on the CD
±
Change tracks on the CD by pressing
or
. Hold the respective
buttons down for fast forward or reverse.
``
253
10 Audio
Rear Seat Entertainment - Dual Screen (RSE)–option
Pause
10
System
Connecting a device to RSE-AUX
1. Pause and restart the CD by pressing
The formats supported by the system are:
.
2.
3.
Stop the CD by pressing
Press
Audio
format
CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,
MP3, WMA
Video
format
DVD video, VCD, SVCD, Divx/
MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo cd
Kodak, Photo CD JPG
Disc
format
DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,
DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,
CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD
.
again to eject the CD.
Home-burned CDs
CDs burned on a home computer can be
played. However, the quality of the sound may
be affected by the type of source file and format used, and by the condition of the disc.
Advanced system settings
RSE-AUX connectors and 12-volt
socket
The three color-coded (yellow-white-red) RSEAUX connectors can be used to connect an
auxiliary device to the RSE system. Always follow the connection instructions provided with
the auxiliary device. Devices connected to
RSE-AUX can use the RSE screens, cordless
headphones, the headphone sockets or the
vehicle’s audio system speakers.
G015700
RSE-AUX connectors are located on the rear side
of the tunnel console
1. Connect the video cable from the auxiliary
device to the yellow connector.
2. Connect the left audio cable to the white
connector and the right cable to the red
connector.
These settings can only be made when there is
no disc in the CD/DVD player.
±
Press MEDIA MENU.
GENERAL SETUP
ANGLE MARK
CAPTION
AUDIO SETUP
3. Connect the power cable to the 12-volt
socket (if the device is designed for 12-volt
current).
DVX(R)
REGISTRATION
For the location of the 12-volt sockets, see
page 75.
PREFERENCES
COMPRESSION
TV TYPE
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
DEFAULTS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
254
10 Audio
Rear Seat Entertainment - Dual Screen (RSE)–option
Replacing batteries in the remote
control and cordless headphones
NOTE
If the temperature in the passenger compartment is high (e.g., if the car has been
parked in the sun for a prolonged period) or
if the batteries in the remote or headphones
are weak, a message will appear on the RSE
screens.
The remote control and headphones each run
on 2 AAA batteries.
10
Concern for the environment
G030395
Used batteries should be disposed of properly
(e.g., at a recycling facility, etc).
G031359
Cordless headphones
Remote control
1. Remove the retaining screw and lift off the
battery cover.
2. Remove the old batteries and insert new
ones as indicated by the symbols in the
battery compartment.
1. Remove the retaining screw and lift off the
battery cover.
2. Remove the old batteries and insert new
ones as indicated by the symbols in the
battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover and tighten the
retaining screw.
3. Replace the battery cover and tighten the
retaining screw.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
255
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
256
258
260
262
265
267
268
269
270
272
273
G000000
Label information..................................................................................
Dimensions ..........................................................................................
Weights ................................................................................................
Fluids.....................................................................................................
Suspension...........................................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Engine specifications............................................................................
Electrical system...................................................................................
Three-way catalytic converter...............................................................
Volvo programs.....................................................................................
SPECIFICATIONS
11
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
11 Specifications
Label information
G032548
G031880
11
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
258
11 Specifications
Label information
Model plate: includes e.g., Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), codes for color and
upholstery, etc.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards
(Canada): Your Volvo is designed to meet
all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the
facing side of the driver's door. For further
information regarding these regulations,
please consult your Volvo retailer.
11
Loads and Tire Pressures: The appearance of the decal will vary, depending on
the market for which the vehicle is
intended. Canadian models have the upper
decal, U.S. models have the lower one.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN): The
VIN plate is located on the top left surface
of the dashboard. The VIN is also stamped
on the right hand door pillar.
Vehicle Emission Control Information:
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable emission standards, as evidenced by
the certification label on the underside of
the hood. For further information regarding
these regulations, please consult your
Volvo retailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
259
11 Specifications
Dimensions
11
G020132
Position
Dimension
in. (mm)
A
Wheelbase
112.6 in (285.7 cm)
B
Length
188.9 in (479.8 cm)
C
Load length, floor, seatback down
79.4 in. (201.8 cm)
D
Load length, cargo area
44 in. (111.8 cm)
E
Height
70.2 in (178.4 cm)
F
Track, front
64.3 in (163.4 cm)
G
Track, rear
63.9 (162.4 cm)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
260
11 Specifications
Dimensions
Position
Dimension
in. (mm)
H
Width
74.7 in (189.8 cm)
I
Width incl. door mirrors
83.1 in. (211.2 cm)
11
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
261
11 Specifications
Weights
Category
USA
Canada
5-seat, 6-cyl, FWDB
5750 lbs
–
AWDC
Gross vehicle weightA
5-seat, 6-cyl,
11
5900 lbs
2680 kg
5-seat, 8-cyl, AWD
5900 lbs
2680 kg
7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD
5915 lbs
–
7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD
6080 lbs
2760 kg
7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD
6100 lbs
2770 kg
5-seat models
1160 lbs
525 kg
7-seat models
1210 lbs
550 kg
5-seat, 6-cyl, FWD
2770 lbs
–
5-seat, 6-cyl, AWD
2880 lbs
1310 kg
5-seat, 8-cyl, AWD
2930 lbs
1330 kg
7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD
2770 lbs
–
7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD
2880 lbs
1310 kg
7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD
2930 lbs
1330 kg
Capacity weight
Permissible axle weight, front*
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
262
11 Specifications
Weights
Category
USA
Canada
5-seat, 6-cyl, FWD
3060 lbs
–
5-seat, 6-cyl, AWD
3150 lbs
1430 kg
5-seat, 8-cyl, AWD
3150 lbs
1430 kg
7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD
3170 lbs
–
7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD
3240 lbs
1470 kg
7-seat, 8-cyl, AWD
3240 lbs
1470 kg
5-seat, FWD
4365 – 4400 lbs
–
5-seat, AWD
4505 – 4655 lbs
2065 – 2130 kg
7-seat, FWD
4530 – 4570 lbs
–
7-seat, AWD
4675 – 4820 lbs
2135 – 2160 kg
Max. roof load
220 lbs
100 kg
Trailer weight, w/o brakes
1650 lbs
750 kg
Trailer weights, with brakes
See the table on page 151
See the table on page 151
Max. tongue weight
See the table on page 151
See the table on page 151
Permissible axle weight, rear
11
Curb weight
A
B
C
Permissible axle weight or gross vehicle weight must never be exceeded.
FWD= front wheel drive
AWD = All Wheel Drive
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
263
11 Specifications
Weights
CAUTION
The maximum permissible axle loads and/
or the gross vehicle weight must not be
exceeded.
11
WARNING
When adding accessories, equipment, luggage and other cargo to your vehicle, the
total capacity weight must not be exceeded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
264
11 Specifications
Fluids
Specifications and capacities
Category
Specification
Fuel tank
21.1 US gals. (80 liters)
Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum octane requirement AKI 87,
recommended rating AKI 91 or above (See also page 128)
Transmission oilA
JWS 3309
TF-80SC
7.4 US qts. (7.0 liters)
11
Miscellaneous
Power steering
1.1 US qts. (1.0 liters)
Windshield washer reservoir
6.9 US qts. (6.5 liters)
Brake fluid
0.63 US qts. (0.6 liters)
Air conditioning system
Front – 2.2 lb. (1 kg), Rear (option) 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg) R 134a (HFC134a)
Coolant
Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (Thermostat begins to open at 194 ° F
(90 ° C)).
3.2 6-cyl.
V8
7.9 US qts. (7.5 liters)
10.7 US qts. (10.2 liters)
Brake fluid
DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N 9437433
Power steering fluid
Volvo synthetic power steering fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 or
equivalent 1.1 US quarts (1.0 liters)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
``
265
11 Specifications
Fluids
11
A
B
Category
Specification
Washer fluid reservoir
Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather conditions 6.9 US quarts (6.5 liters)
Air conditioning system
Refrigerant – R134aB
The transmission oil does not normally need to be changed during the service life of the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven in areas of sustained
temperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, for prolonged driving in mountainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven short distances in temperatures under 40 °F
(5 °C).
See page 90 for volumes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
266
11 Specifications
Suspension
Rear suspension
Individual rear wheel suspension with longitudinal support arms, double link arms and track
rods.
Front suspension
11
Spring strut suspension with integrated shock
absorbers and control arms linked to the support frame. Power-assisted rack and pinion
steering. Safety type steering column.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
267
11 Specifications
Engine oil
Oil specifications
Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC
specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.
11
A
Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel
economy, engine performance, or engine protection.
Engine designation
Volume between MIN-MAX on dipstick
VolumeA
3.2 6-cyl. B6324S
1.27 US qts (1.2 liters)
7.82 US qts (7.4 liters)
V8 AWD B8444S
1.3 US qts (1.2 liters)
7.1 US qts. (6.7 liters)
Including filter replacement.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
268
Volvo recommends Castrol.
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine designation
B6324S
B8444S
kW/rps
175/103
232/100
hp/rpm
235/6200
311/6000
Nm/rps
320/53
440/65
ft. lbs./rpm
235/3200
170/4400
No. of cylinders
6
8
Bore (mm/in.)
3.3/84
3.7/94
Stroke (mm/in.)
3.77/96
3.13/79.5
Cylinder displacement, liters
3.19 (194.7 cu in)
4.41 (268.6 cu. in.)
Compression ratio
10.8:1
10.4:1
Output
11
Torque
Charge air cooler (Intercooler)
Fuel system
Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-compressor to force air into the engine inlet manifold and a charge air cooler to cool the
compressed inlet air. The resulting increase in
air flow raises pressure in the intake manifold
and increases engine power over that developed by the normally-aspirated engine. The
charge air cooler (which resembles a radiator)
is located between the turbo-compressor and
inlet manifold.
The engine is equipped with a multiport fuel
injection system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
269
11 Specifications
Electrical system
General information
11
Battery
3.2 6-cyl.
12-volt system with voltage controlled generator. Single wire system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors,
grounded on the chassis.
Reserve
capacity
(RC)
100 min
Capacity
(Ah)
60
Battery
Battery
3.2 6-cyl.
V8
Voltage
12 V
12 V
Cold start
capacity
(CCA)
520 A
600 A
WARNING
V8
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
120 min
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
70
If you must replace your battery, be sure to
replace it with a battery of the same cold start
capacity and reserve capacity as the original.
(See the decal on the battery).
Bulbs
Bulb
Type
Socket
High beam
H7 65W
–
Low beam
H11 55W
–
Active Bi-Xenon low beam (option)
D1S 35W
Active Bi-Xenon high beam (option)
H9
65W
Front fog lights
H1 55W
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
270
11 Specifications
Electrical system
Bulb
Type
Socket
Front/rear parking lights, front/rear side marker
lights license plate light, rear footwell lighting
W5W
W2,1x9,5d
Front turn signals
H21W
BAY9s
Rear fog light
P21/4W
BAY9s
Brake lights, backup lights
P21W
BA15s
Rear turn signals
PY21W
BA15s
Vanity mirror lighting
1.2W
SV5.5
Front footwell lighting, cargo area lighting
C5W
SV8.5
11
WARNING
Active Bi-Xenon headlights (option) - due to
the high voltage used by these headlights,
these bulbs should only be replaced by an
authorized Volvo service technician.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
271
11 Specifications
Three-way catalytic converter
Three-way catalytic converter general information
•
Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
systems, may cause unusually high threeway catalytic converter temperatures. Do
not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of
power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help
avoid malfunctions that could damage the
three-way catalytic converter.
•
Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system and cause such materials to ignite
under certain wind and weather conditions.
•
Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating.
•
Remember that tampering or unauthorized
modifications to the engine, the Electronic
Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This
includes:
11
NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
272
11 Specifications
Volvo programs
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance
Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON
CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a
separate information package in your glove
compartment.
11
If you require assistance, dial:
American customers: 1-800-638-6586
(1-800-63-VOLVO)
Canadian customers: 1-800-263-0475
Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certified technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas.
Besides passing exams, each technician must
also have worked in the field for two or more
years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze
vehicle problems and perform the necessary
maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at
peak operating condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
273
12 Index
1, 2, 3 ...
Audio
system introduction............................ 236
12-volt sockets.......................................... 75
Audio system
Rear seat entertainment (option)........ 253
Brake fluid................................................ 212
AUTO (climate control)......................... 94, 95
Brake system........................................... 143
Automatic transmission........................... 138
Bulbs........................................................ 217
A/C (air conditioning)........................... 93, 94
Autostart.......................................... 133, 135
Bulbs, replacing....................................... 217
ABS.......................................................... 143
AUX (audio system)................................. 248
Active Bi-Xenon headlights (ABL)........ 60, 64
Average speed........................................... 71
Airbag system............................................ 20
AWD......................................................... 142
A
12
Air distribution...................................... 92, 94
C
Capacities, fluids..................................... 265
Air cleaner................................................ 207
Air conditioning.......................................... 90
Booster cushion
accessory............................................. 42
integrated.............................................. 47
Capacity weight....................................... 175
B
Cargo area cover..................................... 115
Air quality sensor....................................... 93
Bass......................................................... 239
Cargo grid................................................ 114
Air vents..................................................... 92
Battery..................................................... 205
maintenance....................................... 214
specifications...................................... 270
Cargo net................................................. 112
Alarm........................................................ 125
All Wheel Drive......................................... 142
All Wheel Drive – towing.......................... 150
Anti-lock brake system
warning light......................................... 56
Battery – replacing................................... 215
Belt check................................................ 206
Black Box (Vehicle Event Data)............... 202
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 143
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 159
Ashtray..................................................... 109
Blower (fan)................................................ 95
Catalytic converter, three-way................. 272
CD Pause................................................. 249
Central locking system - remote control. 119
Changing a wheel.................................... 182
Changing coolant..................................... 206
Charge air cooler..................................... 269
Check Engine warning light....................... 57
Child restraint anchors......................... 43, 45
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
274
12 Index
Child restraints
recalls and registration......................... 46
D
Child safety................................................ 33
Defroster
rear window and door mirrors.............. 70
rear window and mirrors....................... 95
windshield............................................. 94
Child safety locks.................................... 124
Climate system.......................................... 90
refrigerant............................................. 90
Clock reset button..................................... 54
Coat hanger............................................. 111
Cold weather precautions........................ 157
Compact disc care
CD care............................................... 251
Convertible seats....................................... 39
Coolant.................................................... 211
changing............................................. 206
Courtesy light........................................... 106
Cup holder
rear seat.............................................. 110
Curb weight............................................. 175
Emission inspection readiness................ 203
Engine
specifications...................................... 269
starting................................................ 133
Engine oil................................................. 208
specifications...................................... 268
Detachable trailer hitch............................ 155
Dimensions.............................................. 260
Disabling the passenger's side front airbag............................................................. 25
Display, instrument panel.......................... 54
Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)........................ 239
Door mirrors............................................... 81
defroster............................................... 70
Door mirrors, folding.................................. 60
F
Flat tires
changing............................................. 180
repairing with tire sealing system....... 185
Fog light..................................................... 56
Driving conditions, difficult...................... 137
Fog lights
front*..................................................... 64
Driving economically................................ 136
Folding door mirrors.................................. 60
Driving through water.............................. 137
Front airbags.................................. 21, 22, 25
E
Front seat
folding backrest.................................. 100
manually adjusted............................... 100
Current fuel consumption.......................... 71
Economical driving.................................. 136
Electrically operated moonroof.................. 83
Electrical system...................................... 270
12
Federal Clean Air Act............................... 202
Front seats
power.................................................. 100
Front suspension..................................... 267
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
275
12 Index
Fuel.......................................................... 128
Headlights, high and low beams............... 66
Instrument panel........................................ 54
Fuel filler cap............................................ 131
Heated front seats..................................... 94
Instrument panel lighting........................... 64
Fuel filler door
opening manually............................... 131
unlocking.............................................. 64
High/low beams – replacing.................... 217
Interior lighting......................................... 106
High beam bulb, replacing....................... 222
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 43
Fuel system.............................................. 269
Fuses....................................................... 224
High beam flash......................................... 66
High beam indicator.................................. 54
Hoisting the car........................................ 205
Home safe lighting..................................... 66
12
G
Generator................................................. 270
Generator warning light............................. 56
Glove compartment................................. 110
Grocery bag holder.................................. 115
K
I
Keys......................................................... 118
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 118
Indicator and warning symbols.................. 54
indicator light............................................. 56
L
Infant seats................................................ 37
Label information..................................... 258
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 29
Lighting panel............................................ 63
Inflation pressure, checking..................... 168
Load carriers............................................ 156
H
Inflation pressure table
Canadian models................................ 171
Locking steering wheel............................ 135
Hand brake................................................ 76
Information display.................................... 54
Locks, child safety................................... 124
Hazard warning flashers............................ 70
Inspection readiness................................ 203
Long distance trips.................................. 157
Headlights.................................................. 63
Instrument overview.................................. 52
Gross vehicle weight (GVW).................... 175
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
276
Jack......................................................... 180
Hood, opening/closing.............................. 77
Gasoline................................................... 128
Geartronic – manual shifting.................... 139
J
Locking the car........................................ 122
12 Index
Low beam headlight.................................. 66
P
Rearview mirror with compass (option)..... 80
Rear window defroster.............................. 70
Paint - color code.................................... 198
M
Maintenance............................................ 202
Maintenance, periodic............................. 203
Malfunction indicator light......................... 57
Mirrors
door, folding......................................... 60
power door........................................... 81
rearview, auto-dim function.................. 80
Panel lighting, instrument.......................... 64
Park assist....................................... 147, 148
Parking brake............................................. 76
warning symbol.................................... 56
Parking lights............................................. 63
Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 25
Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 203
Recalls, child restraints.............................. 46
Recirculation.............................................. 94
REDUCE SPEED........................................ 58
Refrigerant (A/C system)............................ 90
Registering child restraints........................ 46
Remote control........................................ 119
replacing the battery........................... 121
Moonroof................................................... 83
Polishing.................................................. 195
Reporting safety defects
Canada................................................. 17
USA....................................................... 16
MP3 player, connecting........................... 248
Power moonroof........................................ 83
Rotating tires........................................... 179
Multifilter with air quality sensor................ 93
Power seat............................................... 100
Permissible axle weight........................... 175
Power steering fluid................................. 212
O
OBD II...................................................... 203
R
Occupant safety........................................ 16
Radiator................................................... 207
Oil quality................................................. 208
Radio functions........................................ 239
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)...... 203
Rain sensor - windshield wipers................ 69
On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 273
Rear seat entertainment (option)............. 253
Owner maintenance................................. 203
Rear suspension...................................... 267
12
S
Safety defects, reporting
Canada................................................. 17
USA....................................................... 16
Safety locks, child.................................... 124
Seat belt..................................................... 18
Seats........................................................ 100
Service..................................................... 202
Service key.............................................. 118
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
277
12 Index
Shiftlock................................................... 133
Temperature control.................................. 95
Transmission, automatic.......................... 138
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags....... 28
Temperature gauge................................... 54
Tread wear indicator................................ 166
Snow chains............................................ 177
Three-way catalytic converter................. 272
Treble....................................................... 239
Snow tires................................................ 177
TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE................. 58
Trip computer............................................ 71
Spare tire – accessing............................. 181
Tire inflation pressure table
Canadian models................................ 171
US models.......................................... 170
Trip odometer............................................ 54
Spare wheel, lowering............................. 181
Speedometer............................................. 54
12
Starting the car........................................ 133
Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...................... 118
Steering wheel lock................................. 135
Stone chips, touching up......................... 198
Storage compartments............ 108, 110, 111
Studded tires........................................... 177
Sun visor.................................................... 84
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 190
Tires
changing.............................................
designations.......................................
improving economy............................
inflation...............................................
inflation pressure, checking................
inflation pressure tables.....................
rotation...............................................
tire sealing system..............................
tread wear indicator............................
Tire sealing system.................................. 185
Tachometer................................................ 54
Towing a trailer........................................ 151
V8-engine........................................... 153
Towing - cars with All Wheel Drive.......... 150
Towing the vehicle................................... 149
Tailgate wipers......................................... 213
Trailer hitch - detachable......................... 155
Technician certification............................ 273
Trailer towing................................... 151, 153
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
278
U
180
172
167
168
168
170
179
185
166
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking................................ 122
opening................................................. 77
Turn signals............................................... 66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 176
Unlocking fuel filler door............................ 64
Unlocking the car..................................... 122
Unpaved roads, driving on...................... 137
V
V8 engine and trailer towing.................... 153
Valet key.................................................. 118
Vanity mirror............................................. 107
Vehicle dimensions.................................. 260
Vehicle Event Data................................... 202
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)......... 259
12 Index
Vehicle loading......................................... 175
Vehicle weights........................................ 262
Volvo Inflatable Curtain.............................. 29
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 273
W
Warning symbol......................................... 54
12
Warning symbol in center of dashboard.... 54
Warranties................................................ 202
Washer fluid reservoir...................... 207, 211
Washing the vehicle................................. 194
Water, driving through............................. 137
Waxing..................................................... 195
Weights.................................................... 262
Windshield washer fluid reservoir............ 211
Windshield wipers.................................... 213
Winter/Wet driving mode......................... 157
Wipers...................................................... 213
W – Winter............................................... 139
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
279
12 Index
12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
280
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%((&JH68VcVYV!6I%-'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<ŽiZWdg\'%%-!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%-Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
: